Home

Fluoroskan Ascent - Diego Di Bernardo

Contents

1. 2 78 Keys dialogs and text 4 2 Eie RE 4 1 4 sete rere ti E aet d 4 3 L Label 4 76 4 77 4 78 4 81 4 82 4 83 4 128 4 131 4 133 di 2 39 2 50 2 51 4 106 4 107 Layout fill by using the 2 26 fill by using the Fill 00 2 28 LOGON 4 76 4 77 4 78 4 80 4 81 4 83 4 84 Linear regressiOn iecit edere 3 58 3 69 1 5 oiii teen aieo e eri ue edat 3 4 List FileS Of 2 2 5 2 6 2 7 3 35 3 38 xviii Ascent Software User s Guide Luminometric1 2 1 15 1 21 1 28 2 6 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 46 2 62 2 76 4 111 4 114 M Mathematical 4 5 Maximum of well 3 61 Maximum Fate itis tede eode esed de aai 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 Measurement cele 2 50 3 47 4 104 Interval 5x coti cu ted sided oC aras 4 107 method no ea ees dvi 1 21 1 28 2 38 4 102 4 114 Measurement type1 28 2 37 2 38 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 43 2 45 2 46 2 78 3 3 3 56 Agglutination ome teet ei
2. UM el 4 51 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 1 1 75 REPLACE ioo EI 4 51 4 1 1 76 edo dust tese Iun 4 52 4 1 1 77 RIGHT rt ene ec eee eere p ates 4 53 4 1 1 78 GB 4 53 4 1 1 79 ROW Mr 4 54 4 1 1 80 reri e et 4 54 4 1 1 81 SEARGH teda Pos a iod 4 55 4 1 1 82 SECOND viz UR 4 56 4 1 1 83 SIGN 4 56 4 1 1 84 SIN REUNIR P 4 57 4 1 1 85 SIN e 4 57 4 1 1 86 Rie gm 4 58 4 1 1 87 NIBIL 4 58 4 1 1 88 STDBEVDBP EE Chace 4 59 4 1 1 89 SUBSTITUTE icio eiie e devra eee dye dee 4 59 4 1 1 90 OU M a repa a etra cae ver d 4 60 4 1 1 91 NISDuNIeMT 4 61 4 1 1 92 nu ECC 4 61 4 1 1 93 IEEE 4 62 4 1 1 94 4 62 4 1 1 95 4 63 4 1 1 96 Du 4 63 4 1 1 97 TIMEVALEUBE 4 64 4 1 1 98 TODAY i et eaa tenete ve e UT da 4 64 4 1 1 99 cT 4 65 4 1 1 100 TRUE bei dett ote ean tius 4 65 4 1 1 101 TRUNC rene de ia nie aie 4 65 4 1 1 102 Rd 4 66 4 1 1 103 2 E 4 67 4 1 1 104 E A E E EA 4 67 4 1 1 105 VAR e a re ERO 4 68 4 1 1 106 WAR cesset ORE 4 68 4 1 1 107 VLOOKU P iie n ec Ra 4 69 4 1 1 108 WEEKDAY ii dece
3. 4 87 4 90 Ascent Software User s Guide START tal ipee ird ME 4 87 4 90 4 93 Gomment Suna 1 23 1 42 2 15 3 76 Configuration 1 18 4 133 4 140 Continue 2 52 2 53 4 92 Control1 6 1 32 1 34 2 9 2 24 2 26 2 31 3 78 4 1 4 35 4 36 4 51 4 60 4 86 4 133 4 151 Copy 1 33 1 45 2 25 3 6 3 8 3 15 3 38 4 82 Cubic polynomial eeeeeseeeee seen 3 69 3 70 3 71 Cubic splilie eiiis iiec eere enean Dr eR EO 3 69 3 71 Curve Fit1 2 1 41 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 15 3 64 3 66 3 69 3 73 3 74 3 75 3 77 3 82 4 99 4 126 CUPVES eR TREE 1 2 1 45 1 46 2 42 2 78 3 3 3 4 3 b8 Cut off1 2 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 15 3 53 3 73 3 74 3 76 3 77 3 80 3 81 3 82 D Data 3 58 4 72 4 74 4 77 4 79 4 81 4 82 4 84 label ence 4 79 4 81 4 82 4 84 Diameter 2 50 2 59 2 61 4 108 Directories1 5 1 9 1 16 1 39 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 55 2 78 3 35 3 37 4 85 4 86 4 88 4 89 4 90 4 96 4 135 4 140 4 144 4 152 Dispense all and 1 26 1 29 2 34 2 45 Dispenser DOSILODc iie es eere ke etus 2 66 SENGS eM p 1 13 1 27 20 O E 1 18 Dri
4. ead 1 2 1 41 1 42 editor esit tec traer ud 1 2 1 16 1 41 1 42 1 49 2 59 4 151 Hcet 4 79 4 81 4 83 Time to change iei ecdesiae edes nexus 3 57 3 60 Time tO maximum nnne nnn 3 61 Time to maximum nennen 3 57 3 59 3 60 Title4 78 4 80 4 81 4 83 4 124 4 128 4 131 4 133 4 135 4 136 4 145 4 151 Tof e TITLE 2 49 2 50 2 51 Transformation 3 72 3 77 4 97 4 152 U EE 2 38 2 60 3 2 4 100 4 130 4 131 USING TOOSE aont oh eee aie at 1 41 Ei i Se DR ap 2 53 TEE 2 53 Waiting Me TP 2 52 2 53 Validate eiaa aaan 1 13 2 62 2 63 4 107 4 108 Validation esses 1 13 2 62 2 74 2 75 4 112 4 113 4 153 xxiv Ascent Software User s Guide View Arrange Sheets acre audere ede 3 6 3 17 Desktop Bar aie erede nee c c mei das ones 2 2 2 9 3 6 3 14 Hide Show Sheets cess eda ec ea enc 3 6 3 16 Procedure1 1 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 19 1 24 1 25 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 36 1 41 1 43 1 44 2 1 2 2 2 11 2 12 2 24 2 36 3 3 3 6 3 7 3 18 3 21 3 64 3 77 4 127 4 128 4 142 Results1 1 1 19 1 23 1 28 1 30 1 40 1 41 1 43 1 46 2 2 2 11 2 36 2 42 2 51 2 52 2 54 2 55 2 57
5. 2 38 2 44 Steps JACUIVate eror decori ve e beige Dan dns 2 2 2 b8 Dispense 1 22 1 26 1 29 1 30 1 46 1 47 2 2 2 11 2 34 2 39 2 44 2 45 2 46 4 114 4 125 Dispense And Measure 1 22 1 29 2 2 2 39 2 45 2 46 4 125 Ascent Software User s Guide xxiii General1 6 1 13 1 20 1 22 1 23 1 29 1 42 1 43 1 46 1 47 2 1 2 14 2 15 2 39 2 45 2 47 3 1 3 5 3 30 3 31 4 1 4 63 4 80 4 100 4 123 InactiVate 2 0 ceteras covey eost aa coe eaae ce UR ode Ese dere ep T 2 2 2 57 1 22 1 29 1 47 2 2 2 11 2 47 2 48 4 125 Measure1 22 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 40 1 41 1 43 1 44 1 46 1 47 2 2 2 11 2 37 2 39 2 42 2 45 2 46 2 50 2 51 2 55 2 64 2 73 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 13 3 36 3 38 3 43 3 52 3 82 4 98 4 100 4 101 4 106 4 124 4 130 Pause 1 22 1 30 2 2 2 11 2 51 2 52 2 53 4 90 4 92 4 125 Print1 17 1 22 1 30 1 41 1 45 2 2 2 8 2 11 2 30 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 71 2 73 2 79 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 19 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 85 4 82 4 97 4 125 Remove1 42 1 43 2 2 2 17 2 22 2 57 2 63 3 6 3 10 3 19 4 100 4 125 Save Load 1 22 1 30 2 2 2 11 2 54 4 91 4 101 4 125 Sake iue endete tra Ud 1 22 1 29 2 2 2 11 2 49 2 50 4 125 T Template
6. 4 26 HOUR a iiis 4 28 4 28 INDEX ANIMI DLE E 4 29 INIIREGT ince th tto tinte tette 4 30 INT 4 30 ISBLANK 4 31 uuo nS 4 31 ISERROR ete ete 4 32 ISLOGICA eee 4 32 Kn c 4 33 ISINONT EX nectit et bises best tT LEDs 4 33 ISNUMBER 4 34 ISREF gel tras EN 4 34 ASQ 4 35 el 4 35 c 4 36 peres os trenes 4 36 folc 4 37 4 37 LOOKUP EE 4 38 LOWER sett nied eid te Ph 4 39 MATCH iiec e 4 39 opto Nar si UN DUE 4 41 endete ee aereis 4 41 o NNN 4 42 MINUTE oett ette eina 4 43 MOD ieu RID hs LH IM os 4 44 MONTH m 4 44 xin c Inu NI rors ne DAL 4 45 INA tacet ite 4 45 NOT P uL UN 4 46 NOW on 4 46 ODD ete rei tlt 4 47 OFFSET 4 47 EDI Mie 4 49 tte ere 4 49 PRODUCT ttes 4 50 PROPER 4 50
7. The operation buttons are e Find Reference Address Specifies what kind of reference address to search for e Replace with Reference Address Identifies the address type that will replace the address searched for e Current Cell Data Specifies the contents of the active cell e Whole Sheet Finds and Replaces in the whole sheet e Selected Area Finds and Replaces in the selected area e Prompt on Replace Asks to confirm the replacement e Find Next Finds the next reference address be replaced Ascent Software User s Guide 3 33 e Replace Replaces the searched address type in the active cell with the new address type e Replace All Finds and Replaces every occurrence 3 2 7 Sheet 3 2 7 1 New Sheet New Sheet Sheet menu or ml Use this command to create a new worksheet and specify the name of the sheet Enter sheet name po Cancel 3 34 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 7 2 Open Sheet Open Sheet Sheet menu or i Use this command to open an existing sheet File Name Directories Cancel KIN VTS gt ASCENT Network List Files of Type Drives Default vts Displays the Open dialog box where you can open an existing file You can have several worksheets open simultaneously but you view them individually e File Name Displays the default file specification VTS and a list of the VTS files in the curr
8. eee 1 15 Opening Sessions seen 1 15 Example 4 1 16 Creating new 02 1 16 Using tete aes 1 17 olay its DIELO EA 1 18 1 2 netted 1 19 1 19 Desktops i a ee ce eee aes 1 19 Procedure 1 19 StepliSt i xu Rae le ee 1 20 thereon dite fe nU RE meu em 1 21 General Step A ied 1 23 Area definition dc de 1 24 LAYOUT AA ios retreats RE 1 25 Settlhgs sees ette es pee west keen ete 1 26 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 1 10 4 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 RUNStatuSsa ode E E 1 28 51 1 28 Iricubate St pi eh ae ER eor eels 1 29 1 29 Dispense step not 1 29 Dispense And Measure step not CF 1 29 Pause step vice eet Put el 1 30 Save LOad step osi eS 1 30 Print Step eed eere rei ter e ic eee 1 30 Area 4 1 30 om 1 32 2 Pet Rie Enea 1 34 ine eden at 1 36 Results
9. blank 1 Empty i e not containing meaningful data In a memory blank cells may contain a particular bit pattern that has no assigned value 2 Blanks in the assays reagent blank reagent blank without any sample specific blank each calibrator control or sample has its own blank and both blanks both reagent blank and specific blank button An area on a screen that when activated by means of a pointing device or predetermined key sequence causes an action to be initiated When the button is activated or pressed its appearance will normally change so that it appears recessed A horizontal or vertical row of buttons is called a button bar See command button 4 130 Ascent Software User s Guide byte A fixed number of bits that can be treated as a unit by the computer hardware It is a subdivision of a word and typically comprises 8 bits although 6 7 or 9 bits are occasionally encountered The letters B and b are used as symbols for byte as in MB megabyte and GB gigabyte although the word is often written in full in such cases as in Mbyte cascade A way of arranging open windows on the desktop so that they overlap each other with the title bar of each window remaining visible cascading menu A hierarchical graphical menu system in which a side menu of subcategories is displayed when the pointer is placed on the main category case sensitive Requiring or making a dist
10. Click Finish to complete Setup The icon shortcut is generated automatically onto the desktop 1 3 6 Instrument setup The Instrument Setup allows the user to configure the Ascent Software settings Instrument settings and the Startup settings The following options are available in the Setup menu on the Procedure Desktop e Plate Templates The user can edit plate templates e Filters The user can modify filter settings e Password The user can add and change the system password e Dispensers The user can set the dispenser options e Colors The user can define the colors for the different well types e Printout The user can define the printout options 1 12 Ascent Software User s Guide e Instrument Status The user can retrieve information on the Instrument Status Settings in the General step on the Procedure Desktop include Instrument and Dispenser settings e Instrument settings The user can set instrument parameters e Dispenser settings The user can set dispensing speeds For more information see General step Settings on p 1 26 1 3 7 Instrument communication Ascent Software controls the instrument via the serial interface COM1 COM4 RS 232C The baud rate is 9600 The character format is 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity with XON XOFF handshaking The above mentioned communication settings are carried out automatically 1 3 8 Dispensers The dispenser units from
11. Setup Password Password in use Cancel There is one password for the program which can be changed by the user The given password is cryptic for more information see Section Setup Password in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual If the password is accepted the program starts 1 14 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 3 11 Quick start When the program is started it is possible to press the Start button immediately The Start button starts the measurement of a 96 well plate Default session and gives the results 1 3 12 Opening Sessions The Session Open command on the Procedure Desktop displays the Open Session dialog box where you can select and load an existing session file Open Session File Name Directories Calciumd sef c Cellprod sef Cellprol sef B5 Ascent Eyfp sef Eyfpd sef Picogred sef Picogree sef Cancel Network List Files of Drives Session Files SEF e File Name Select or type the name of the Session you want to open The fixed extension of the filename is sef for the Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF and sec for the Fluoroskan Ascent FL The Fluoroskan Ascent FL can however read sec sef and sel Luminoskan Ascent luminometric file files but only save them as sec files e Drives Select the drive in which the program stores the Session you want to open Ascent Software
12. 2 0 00 1 40 PANINO 1 41 USING 1 41 Making 1 42 Creating your OWN 22 1 42 Selecting the 1 42 General stepo eem UE Pn 1 42 Selecting the measurement area 1 42 Defining the plate 1 42 Selecting Steps to the Procedure 1 43 Defining parameters to 1 43 Processing results and 1 43 Executing the Session 4000 00 1 44 Executing loops of 2 1 46 Modifying an existing 4 1 47 Example 1 47 Running an application from the example applications 1 48 Template Edito ma r ee ieee el A hs 1 49 Managindg iles eR HERES 1 50 Opening and saving 5 5 1 50 File str ctutes 1 51 Importing and 1 51 BIB i st 1 51 Procedure 2224 2
13. Date and time of adding 850 7 0 100 988998 26 2 2002 14 09 06 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 7 Options The Options dialog allows the user to set the startup parameters the serial port selection startup temperature for incubation session autosave parameters and the dispenser control e Serial port Searches for the instrument in the selected port 1 4 or automatically Auto in every port If autosearch fails use the port selection e Startup temperature When the program is started the incubation goes on Note To switch the incubation off set the temperature to ambient temperature The temperature inside the instrument is approx 3 C above the ambient temperature Ascent Software User s Guide 2 77 Session autosave lf the session data is changed the current session is saved automatically Note session is overwritten over the existing session Automatic session name generation Saves the whole session related data sef Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF sec Fluoroskan Ascent FL vtb vtg and lay files automatically when a new run is executed The name format is MMddhhmm ext where MM is the month dd the day hh the hours and mm the minutes The extension corresponds to the data file extension sef Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF sec Fluoroskan Ascent FL vtb vtg or lay Note Automatic session name generatio
14. See Also HLOOKUP INDEX LOOKUP and MATCH functions 4 2 2 108 WEEKDAY Description Returns the day of the week that corresponds to the supplied date Syntax WEEKDAY seria _number The seria _number is the date expressed as serial number or as text e g 06 21 94 or 21 94 Remarks WEEKDAY returns a number ranging from 1 Sunday to 7 Saturday See Also DAY NOW TEXT and TODAY functions Examples WEEKDAY 34399 92 returns 1 indicating Sunday WEEKDAY 06 21 94 returns 3 indicating Tuesday 4 70 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 109 YEAR Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the year that corresponds to the supplied date YEAR ser a _number The serial number is the date expressed as serial number or as text e g 06 21 94 or 21 Jun 94 DAY HOUR MINUTE MONTH NOW SECOND TODAY and WEEKDAY functions YEAR 34328 returns 1993 YEAR 06 21 94 returns 1994 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 71 4 3 Chart reference 4 3 1 Chart terminology Charts provide a graphical presentation of data Values or data points are displayed in formats such as bars lines markers filled areas bubbles or pie slices These data points are grouped into series that are identified with unique colors or patterns In many chart types one data point from each series is grouped together by category along an axis Charts can also have titles backdrops legends plots an
15. 1 Ensure that the cable is connected in both ends 2 Reset the computer and the instrument Ensure that the cable is undamaged Ensure that the cable is undamaged See readme txt file in the Ascent directory See readme txt file in the Ascent directory Ascent Software User s Guide 4 6 2 Printer Message e Error encountered during printing e Printer error e Printing error e Printing aborted in the Print Manager 4 6 3 Sheet Message e Invalid formula syntax e Zero concentration not allowed Try 0 0001 instead same concentration is not allowed in different calibrators e Curve fit variable missing Ascent Software User s Guide Reason An error did occur during printing There is a problem in the printer There may be a problem in the printer settings Print jobs were canceled in the Print Manager Reason The command you have entered is incorrect The fit type is 4PL or the conc transformation is log and the concentration zero Different calibrators have the same concentration The hidden sheet specific data is corrupted or missing Actions Ensure that the printer and printer settings are correct Ensure that the printer power is on and is online Ensure that the printer settings are correct Try again Actions Check the list separator in the Windows environment Refer to A Z Worksheet Function Reference in the Reference part of th
16. 12 2181 10 8 aU The step parameters are requested in the Parameters entry area The area definition settings and layout of the General step are applied to the whole session However every measurement and dispense step may have its own area definition settings and layout The areas are modified by using the area definition The layouts are modified by using the layout editor 1 5 4 Steplist The Steplist is a collection of all the Steps defined for a session You can add and delete steps from the Steplist The Steplist has a vertical scroll bar for viewing the Steps with the mouse The scroll bar is displayed when the steps do not fit completely in the window The scroll bar is located to the right of the Steplist You can also add or remove an active step from the Steplist by using the right mouse button in the Steplist area 1 20 Ascent Software User s Guide The order of the Steps can be changed by drag and drop Select a Step keep the mouse button down move the Step icon to a new location in the Steplist and release the mouse button Steplist General Shakel Incubatet Ron Pausel m SavelLoadi 1 5 5 Steps Steps is a collection of basic operations that are performed in a certain sequence You can have to designate each step with a specific name The step parameters are requested in the Parameters entry area For Fluoroskan Ascent FL the measurement method luminometric
17. 4 2 2 104 WALUE Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the specified text as a number VALUE text The text is any text string a formula that changes to a text string or a cell reference that contains a text string You can also specify a date or time in a recognizable format e g M DD YY for dates or AM PM for time If the format is not recognized the ZVALUE is returned FIXED and TEXT functions VALUE 9800 returns 9800 VALUE 123 returns 123 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 67 4 2 2 105 VAR Description Returns the variance of a population based on a sample of values Syntax VAR number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers See Also STDEV STDEVP and VARP functions Examples VAR 4 0 3 0 3 0 3 5 2 5 4 0 3 5 returns 31 4 2 2 106 Description Returns the variance of a population based on an entire population of values Syntax VARP number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers See Also STDEV STDEVP and VAR functions Examples VARP 4 0 3 0 3 0 3 5 2 5 4 0 3 5 returns 27 4 68 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 107 Description Searches the first column of a table for value and returns th
18. Cancel Use this command to define the colors for the different well types i e calibrators controls samples and blanks The type is selected from the drop down list and the color is selected from the palette The selected color is displayed in the field in front of the Type option menu and in the list beside the name of the type The default color for all well types is black The colors are used in the Layout Editor and in Results sheets If the Layout Editor is visible when colors are changed the previously filled wells will keep their original colors until the layout is totally updated Note Light colors may not be visible in printouts 2 68 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 6 6 Printout Printout Setup menu Setup Printout amp LAscent SoftwarekC amp F amp R amp D m amp CPages amp P amp N NH m E E 5 5 a 100 OK Cancel i The Printout command controls the headers footers margins and many other printout options Headers and footers are descriptive texts which are printed at the top and bottom of every page in your step You can add delete edit format and position headers and footers and view them as they will be printed e Header The area in the Header box shows you the contents of the header Ascent Software User s Guide 2 69 2 70 Footer The area in the Footer box shows you the contents of the footer
19. Note Before priming the plate is retracted If the dispensers are in the X Y or M positions priming will be done straight to the center of the plate If priming to the plate is not desired the tips should be moved into the container s or a suitable waste vessel 2 12 Ascent Software User s Guide Prime Dispenser ET 41 800 e Prime dispenser Primes the selected dispenser 1 2 3 or All Only the buttons of the installed dispensers are enabled When the All button is pressed the priming command of every dispenser in use is sent to the instrument one after another e Volume pl Volume 100 9900 ul in steps of 100 ul increments When the Close button is pressed no priming commands are sent 2 1 4 5 Empty not CF Empty Execute menu Use this command to empty the dispenser v Empty Dispenser Ascent Software User s Guide 2 13 e Empty dispenser Empties the selected dispenser Only the buttons of the installed dispensers are enabled e All Empties all dispensers 2 1 5 Steps The selections of the Area definition Layout and Settings tabviews apply as default throughout all selected steps unless the steps have them defined with the Overwrite general step settings check box 2 1 5 1 General The General step is the first step of every session The user cannot add or remove the General step There is no shortcut button for the General step 2 14 A
20. Remarks See Also Examples 4 2 2 2 ACOS Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Returns the absolute value of a number ABS number The number is any integer An absolute value does not display a positive or negative sign SIGN function ABS 1 returns 1 ABS 1 returns 1 Returns the arccosine of a number ACOS number The number is the cosine of the angle The cosine can range from 1 to 1 The resulting angle is returned in radians from 0 to COS and functions ACOS 5 ACOS 2 returns 1 05 returns 1 77 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 7 4 2 2 3 ACOSH Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number ACOSH number The number is any number equal to or greater than 1 ASINH ATANH and COSH functions ACOSH 1 2 returns 62 ACOSH 3 returns 1 76 4 2 2 4 ADDRESS Description Syntax Creates a cell address as text ADDRESS row column ref type af sheet The row is the row number for the cell The addressco umn is the column number for the cell address The ref type is the cell reference type The following table lists the values for this argument Argument Reference type 1 Absolute 2 Absolute row relative column 3 Relative row absolute column 4 Relative The a7 is the reference format This argument must be TRUE to represent an A1 reference format Formula One does not supp
21. Saves the current session with a new name Use the Status Bar command in the View menu to display or hide the status bar 3 2 4 3 Tool Bar Tool Bar View menu Along the top of the Desktop window you can see a horizontal strip containing several tools this is the tool bar It offers the most commonly used functions from the menu as tool buttons Although these buttons perform the same functions as their menu counterparts they are more convenient to use Results tool bar New Save Open Print New Cut Paste Zoom Cut Off Session Sheet Sheet to from Out Blank Prop CB CB Subtraction erties Ry 3 j lele 2 2 721 Save Print Delete Copy Zoom Curve Fit Enable Session Sheet Area Sheet to CB In Disable CB Clipboard Use the Tool Bar command in the View menu to display or to hide the tool bar Ascent Software User s Guide 3 15 3 2 4 4 Tabs Bar Tabs Bar On Top View menu Use this command to display the Tabs Bar either on top of the view or at the bottom of the view 3 2 4 5 Hide Show Sheets Hide Show Sheets View menu Use this command to select visible sheets The sheets vary according to the application employed 53 Hide Show Sheets Steps Visible RunStatus Visible Measurel Visible Measurel f2 Visible e Sheet Contains the list of existing sheets 3 16 Ascent Software User s Guide e All Visible Select if you want all sheets to be v
22. ee eee er ete et 2 13 cler e I RE 2 14 Generalz 2 14 Sessiori loCk 4 iie ces sce E 2 15 Area 2 17 um 2 18 Middle Poi 2 19 Whole Well cessere 2 20 Horizontal 2 21 Vertical Diagonal eene 2 22 BISAO NUA LEE 2 22 A EER A E IRA 2 23 Settings ete Gaia tain ee 2 32 eei E E EE AA T T 2 36 Masure E TR RR REN 2 37 Single 3 2 38 M 2 40 emm 2 41 D al 2 42 LIT GILL 2 42 eters 2 43 Dispense not 2 44 Dispense And Measure not CF 2 45 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 9 2 1 5 10 2 1 5 11 2 1 5 12 2 1 5 13 2 1 5 14 2 1 5 15 2 1 5 16 2 1 5 17 2 1 5 18 2 1 6 2 1 6 1 2 1 6 2 2 1 6 3 2 1 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 2 1 6 5 2 1 6 6 2 1 6 7 2 1 7 2 1 8 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 3 1 2 4 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 4 vi Inc bate ip oec b 2 47 a tedio o ad Rt ds 2 49 pode MEER 2 51 Sa8
23. 1 The result of data processing presented external to the system or the process of presenting the data externally The output from a computer can be in a form for use by people e g printed or displayed or it may be ready for input to another system or process when it may be encoded magnetically or optically on a tape or disk 2 A signal that is obtained from an electrical circuit such as a logic circuit 3 To produce a result or signal override To prevent something from happening in a program or in an operating system or to initiate another response For example a user can often override and thus abort a lengthy sorting procedure in a database program by pressing the Escape key overwrite To write data to a location memory or tape or disk and in doing so to destroy any data already contained in that location parallel interface see also Centronics interface and parallel printer A connection point that comprises a set of individual electric connections each having a specified function usually either data or control parallel port An input output socket on a computer or other device for a parallel interface A parallel port on a computer is often used for a parallel printer parallel printer A printer with a parallel interface that connects to a computer by means of a parallel port The original parallel printer interface Centronics was unidirectional Most parallel ports current comp
24. Description Syntax Truncates the given number to an integer TRUNC number precision The number is any value The precision is the number of decimal places allowed in the truncated number Omitting this argument assumes a precision of 0 Ascent Software User s Guide Remarks See Also Examples The TRUNC removes the fractional part of a number to the specified precision without rounding the number CEILING FLOOR INT MOD and ROUND functions TRUNC 123 456 2 returns 123 45 TRUNC 9899 435 2 returns 9800 4 2 2 102 TYPE Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples 4 66 Returns the argument type of the given expression TYPE expression The expression is any expression The following table lists the expression types and numbers Expression type Number Number 1 Text string 2 Logical value 4 Error value 16 ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions TYPE A1 returns 1 if cell A1 contains a number TYPE Customer returns 2 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 103 UPPER Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Changes the characters in the specified string to uppercase characters UPPER texz The text is any string The numerical characters in the string are not changed LOWER and PROPER functions UPPER Moving type 7 returns MOVING TYPE 7 UPPER Name returns MY NAME
25. Fluoroskan Ascent This is the Help for Fluoroskan Ascent FL and Fluoroskan Ascent e Making applications Result sheets References The Help main menu buttons are e Hide Hides the left hand side navigation window To display the navigation window again click the Show button that appears instead of the Hide button e Back Takes you back to the previous view in your view history e Forward Takes you to the next view in your view history Print Prints a single topic or multiple topics You can access the help content in three different ways by selecting one of the following tabs e Contents Browse the help topics by subject e Index Type in a keyword or browse all keywords to find a specific topic Ascent Software User s Guide 2 79 e Search Find a specific help topic by entering words to search in the help content Note images in the help application contain links to topics When you see an image move the cursor across the image to find the links 2 80 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 Results Desktop 3 1 General results 3 1 1 Standard Sheets 3 1 1 1 Measurements Every measurement step generates a measurement sheet automatically The name of the sheet is the same as the measurement step name and the default measurement step name is Measure1 In Dual and Dual kinetic measurements two measurement sheets are generated The name of the first sheet is the same as th
26. This menu item creates a processor sheet which offers a possibility to perform kinetic calculations This sheet does not require a plate layout In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet Ascent Software User s Guide 3 55 3 2 8 7 1 Source Processors sheet properties e Source sheet name Select the sheet containing your kinetic measurement data The measurement type has to be Kinetic Dual Kinetic or Monitor 3 56 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 7 2 Calculation Processors sheet properties eeg e E e e e e Different calculation types left column have different options right column available The options are listed under each calculation type The processing results of Maximum rate Time to maximum rate Time to maximum rate 2 and Time to change are based on the chosen kinetic reaction course Undefined Increasing or Decreasing Ascent Software User s Guide 3 57 Calculation type Average rate Also known as normal rate The slope of the reaction will be calculated from the raw data and time stamps for each well using the linear least squares method LLS of all n fluorescence luminescence readings The average kinetic rate slope of the A fluorescence luminescence vs time curve will be calculated by linear regression using all the data points within the selected raw data and time range Kinetic rate s or Kinetic rate m
27. number is a date represented as a serial number or as text e g 06 21 94 or 21 Jun 94 HOUR MINUTE MONTH NOW SECOND TODAY WEEKDAY and YEAR functions DAY 34399 returns 6 DAY 06 21 94 returns 21 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 26 ERROR TYPE Description Returns a number corresponding to an error Syntax ERROR TYPE error_ref The error_ref is a cell reference Remarks The following table lists the error text and associated error numbers returned by this function Number Error text 1 NULL 2 DIV 0 3 VALUE 4 REF 5 NAME 6 NUM 7 N A N A Other See Also ISERR and ISERROR functions Examples ERROR TYPE A1 returns 2 if the formula in cell A1 attempts to divide by zero Ascent Software User s Guide 4 21 4 2 2 27 EVEN Description Syntax See Also Examples Rounds the specified number up to the nearest even integer EVEN number The number is any number a formula that evaluates to a number or a reference to a cell that contains a number CEILING FLOOR INT ODD ROUND and TRUNC functions EVEN 2 5 returns 4 EVEN 2030 45 returns 2032 4 2 2 28 EXACT Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 22 Compares two expressions for identical case sensitive matches True is returned if the expressions are identical False is returned if they are not identical EXACT expression expression2 The expression is any text The expression2 is any tex
28. 3 2 8 9 3 GlassificatiOn aoctor dra cx e 3 73 3 2 8 9 4 MISERE EE 3 75 3 2 8 9 5 Example Curve Fit 3 76 3 2 8 10 GUT Off e added ec 3 77 3 2 8 10 1 SOUL CO cctacsdustachadicctessatteacadbebanddsadSncsanhanntuaacantoasahieteccnassie 3 78 3 2 8 10 2 CIASSITICATION cocto ca rer ek rese enc perse Ene qa Ee RR 3 79 3 2 8 10 3 MEM 3 80 3 2 9 Setup eiue eh ui eiie ERIT 3 82 3 2 9 1 diat osse e eua cete e edes un 3 82 3 2 10 REESEN 3 84 viii Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 4 1 4 1 Keyboard guide 4 1 4 1 1 General Keys dee ede ee ies 4 1 4 1 2 Dialogs and text lines sees 4 2 4 1 3 Worksheet keys sess 4 3 4 2 Calculations etre eei stetit 4 5 4 2 1 Mathematical operators 040 4 5 4 2 2 A Z worksheet function reference 4 6 4 2 2 1 ABS aue tete nta 4 7 4 2 2 2 PCOS X dots baee 4 7 4 1 1 3 ACOSH 2 urine uei 4 8 4 1 1 4 ariete ia 4 8 4 1 1 5 AND sieved lies icity iis Ue ee Male RAE 4 9 4 1 1 6 ASINI tnit etos ce rh cU 4 10 4 1 1 7 ASINEL 2 21 ent aee o Hr der 4 10 4 1 1 8 S dio oed o Mites oido Meere 4 11 4 1 1 9 TIAN ogi sche dani Ep her 4 11 4 1 1 10 4 12
29. 4 124 4 130 Measure 1 1 47 2 34 3 1 3 3 3 4 3 20 3 24 3 39 1 3 20 3 24 3 39 Tae 3 6 3 51 3 52 3 82 New1 42 1 49 1 50 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 55 2 67 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 34 3 40 3 6 3 54 3 55 3 82 4 113 3 6 3 62 3 63 3 82 RunStatus 1 28 1 40 1 41 2 36 3 3 3 4 3 20 3 24 3 39 3 40 4 127 Source3 4 3 26 3 40 3 48 3 49 3 51 3 54 3 56 3 62 3 64 3 65 3 75 3 78 3 81 4 98 Steps1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 40 1 41 1 43 1 46 2 2 2 14 2 30 2 37 2 44 2 45 2 47 2 49 2 51 2 52 2 54 2 55 2 56 2 57 2 58 3 3 3 4 3 20 3 24 3 39 3 40 4 91 Sigmoid 3 69 3 71 3 72 Signal2 39 2 62 2 74 2 75 3 60 3 61 3 67 3 70 3 71 4 102 4 104 4 105 4 107 4 111 4 112 4 115 4 117 4 128 4 129 4 132 4 133 4 137 4 141 4 143 Singular Value Decomposition SVD 3 69 3 70 3 71 SOP Ge rM ER 2 67 2 74 3 58 Speed eite 1 27 2 34 2 35 2 50 2 66 2 67 4 42 4 108 4 118 Spreadsheet1 2 1 40 1 41 1 43 2 56 3 64 3 70 4 9 4 47 4 48 4 73 4 127 4 131 4 134 4 149 4 153 Startup 0 2 48 2 77
30. 4 89 PASSWOPG 1 12 1 14 2 2 2 65 Plate Templates 1 12 1 18 1 42 1 49 2 2 2 59 1 12 1 18 2 2 2 69 3 21 Sheet Advanced 3 5 3 6 3 38 3 40 3 50 Delate 1 49 2 60 3 6 3 15 3 39 4 98 New1 42 1 49 1 50 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 55 2 67 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 34 3 40 Open 1 7 1 15 1 33 1 47 1 48 2 2 2 4 2 5 2 11 2 25 2 26 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 35 4 124 Properties 1 6 3 2 3 4 3 6 3 25 3 40 3 47 3 51 3 53 3 54 3 55 3 63 3 64 3 77 4 85 Renate cete edd edes brc Opes e dpa da ep Duy OO 3 3 3 6 3 39 xxii Ascent Software User s Guide Save1 22 1 30 1 33 1 46 1 48 2 2 2 6 2 11 2 25 2 54 2 55 2 73 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 36 3 37 4 82 4 88 4 91 4 101 4 124 4 125 4 146 Save 1 33 2 2 2 6 2 25 3 6 3 7 4 82 4 88 4 124 4 146 Sheets Blank Subtraction 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 53 3 77 3 82 4 126 Curve Fit1 2 1 41 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 15 3 64 3 66 3 69 3 73 3 74 3 75 3 77 3 82 4 99 4 126 222 1 2 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 15 3 73 3 77 3 80 3 81 3 82 1 22 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 40 1 41 1 43 1 44 1 46 1 47 2 2 2 11 2 37 2 39 2 42 2 45 2 46 2 50 2 51 2 55 2 64 2 73 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 13 3 36 3 38 3 43 3 52 3 82 4 98 4 100 4 101 4 106
31. Execute 1 26 1 27 1 29 1 46 1 47 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 2 38 2 2 2 13 2 14 4 18 4 45 4 61 4 130 2 2 2 11 2 12 Plate QUE 2 2 2 11 2 12 cca 2 2 2 12 2 13 2 45 2 46 Stance S 1 6 1 7 1 13 1 15 1 44 2 11 2 67 4 87 Executing loops Of 1 46 3 66 3 67 File types miri 1 50 2 6 2 7 4 122 Batch file be ct 4 92 files produced by each session file 4 122 miscellaneous e ade pesar Tes stant 4 122 session file 1 11 1 15 2 25 4 86 4 87 4 92 4 93 4 122 t xt file innt eee beue uten 1 34 2 27 2 73 4 122 Reborn 1 51 4 122 4 153 Fill dialog1 33 1 34 1 35 1 42 2 23 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 30 2 31 3 32 4 84 Filter1 12 1 13 1 14 1 18 2 37 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 62 2 63 2 64 2 74 2 75 2 76 3 55 4 91 4 103 4 106 4 107 4 108 4 109 4 111 4 112 4 113 4 115 4 116 4 117 Filter pair1 13 1 14 2 37 2 39 2 40 2 42 2 62 2 63 2 64 2 74 3 55 4 91 4 107 4 108 4 109 4 111 4 112 Validation secte ren Pre 2 63 Finish DUON corp rre Ru UR CORN 3 45 Fluorometric 1 2 1 13 1 21 1 28 2 3
32. Pages high can range from 1 to 100 Note Pages Wide and Pages High are used together with Fit 70 Pages to define how many papers can maximum be used when you scale the data to the page s If the data requires width but not height then Pages Wide 19 and Pages High 1 On the other hand if the data requires height but not width then Pages Wide 1 and Pages High 19 Scale Reduces or enlarges the printed sheet You can reduce the printed sheet to 10 of its normal size or enlarge it up to 400 The default value is 10096 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 23 3 2 5 6 Set Print Area Set Print Area Print menu Use this command to set the print area Defines the selected cells as the portion of the worksheet that you want to print The print area given separately for every sheet including the Measure1 Steps RunStatus and Measure1 Curves sheets is stored from run to run 3 2 5 7 Print Area Print Area Print menu or E Use this command to print the currently selected area Select the area by using the mouse 3 24 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 5 8 Print Setup Print Setup Print menu Use this command to set the print setup Note The layout of this dialog depends on the Windows version Print Setup Controls the printer selection page orientation and the paper size and source e Options Properties The contents of this dialog box depends on the Windows version and the printer emplo
33. SEARCH and TRIM functions REPLACE For the year 1993 18 1 4 returns For the year 1994 Repeats a text string a specified number of times REPT text number The text is any text string The number is the number of times that you want the text to be repeated If the number is 0 empty text is returned The result of the REPT cannot exceed 255 characters REPT error 3 returns error error error Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 77 RIGHT Description Returns the characters furthest right from the given text string Syntax RIGHT text num chars The text is any text string The num chars is the number of characters one wishes to return The value must be greater than or equal to zero If the num chars is greater than the number of characters in the text the entire string is returned Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1 See Also LEFT and MID functions Examples RIGHT 2nd Quarter returns r RIGHT 2nd Quarter 7 returns Quarter 4 2 2 78 ROUND Description Rounds the given number to the supplied number of decimal places Syntax ROUND number precision The number is any value The precision is the number of decimal places to which the number is rounded When a negative precision is used the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of the significant digits specified by the precision are replaced with zeros If the p
34. The gain difference of adjusted gains between the measuring channels is too high The reader may still seem to operate correctly but there is a risk of incorrect measurement results Well agglutination data of a profile point outside the range 1 26 was requested Actions Check that connector X6 on the reader PCB is properly inserted Check that the chopper wheel rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Insert the filter wheel Check that the filter wheel rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Check that the filter wheel rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Check that the optics is not soiled and clean it if necessary Check that there is no leakage of light from outside the instrument into the measuring chamber Try with another filter wheel If the error persists contact service Contact service Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Invalid filter number failure lamp is off e Shaker timeout Shaker position error e Reference channel gain not within limits Ascent Software User s Guide Reason The reader was requested to select a filter number not in the range of 1 8 The measured lamp intensity after switching the lamp on is too low A measure or blank command is rec
35. The instrument selects the reference chip giving a suitable signal and saves the value in the memory for the autocalibration procedure If the validation procedure does not find a suitable reference chip the program requests if the user still wants to use this filter pair If the answer is Yes the pair can be used in measurements The instrument selects the reference channel for excitation intensity compensation in the autocalibration system For further information see the User Manual of the instrument used Y Filters Fluorometric filter pairs 14 1 2002 13 41 46 14 1 2002 13 41 46 14 1 2002 13 41 46 14 1 2002 13 41 46 finem 14 1 2002 13 41 46 14 1 2002 13 41 46 Vobdate Scaling The following commands are available Add Defines a new fluorometric filter pair positions and wavelengths to be validated or a new luminometric filter Fluoroskan Ascent FL only 2 62 Ascent Software User s Guide Add filter pair Remove The action is confirmed Yes No dialog and if the user selects Yes an existing filter filter pair is removed Validate Validates an existing filter pair for more information see Filter Pair Validation Scaling Sets a scaling factor Ascent Software User s Guide 2 63 Adjust scaling factor Sets a user defined scaling factor to the indicated filter pair the default value is 1 The measured values are multiplied by this factor In the fluo
36. To carry out an instruction or program This includes interpreting machine instructions performing subroutines and applying functions to sets of parameters 4 136 Ascent Software User s Guide export To introduce information to another location or to a different software program Files that consist only of text can be exported in ASCII plain text format For files with graphics however the receiving system or program must offer some support for the exported file s format extension The period and up to three characters at the end of a filename An extension usually identifies the kind of information a file contains file Information held on backing store i e usually on magnetic disk or magnetic tape in order a to enable it to persist beyond the time of execution of a single job and or b to overcome space limitations in main memory Files may hold data programs documents pictures or any other information They are referred to by filename file manager A program for organizing a set of files file name or filename An identifying character string used to refer to a file The name can be generated by software or created by the user floating menu The menu that appears when you press the right mouse button The position of the menu is the current cursor position floppy disk drive diskette drive FDD A device that accepts flexible magnetic disks i e floppy dis
37. User s Guide Software version 2 6 Revision 3 0 Mar 2002 Copyright 1997 2002 Cat no 1506610 Table of Contents WRN 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 3 4 2 1 3 4 3 1 3 5 1 3 6 1 3 7 1 3 8 1 3 9 1 3 10 1 3 11 1 3 12 1 3 13 1 3 14 1 3 15 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 5 5 1 2 1 5 5 1 3 OVGEVIGW eerte nU Ree 1 1 Irnitrod ctlon nidi adore de 1 1 Productsupport iie eget pe 1 3 Getting started ccs utc erit me e Puri eter eire 1 4 System hardware requirements 1 4 Instrument hardware 1 4 Software requirements sss 1 5 Before installation sess 1 6 Microsoft Windows language settings 1 6 Letters permitted with Ascent Software installation 1 6 Printer 8 1 6 Installation of Ascent 1 7 Instrument setup 1 12 Instrument 1 13 eere Ee eder 1 13 Filter Pair validation ssesseeee 1 13 Password nime eite iem enisi 1 14
38. User s Guide 1 15 e Directories Select the directory in which the program stores the Session you want to open 1 3 13 Example Sessions Some ready made example sessions are supplied with the program When the program is installed the default session is loaded It contains definitions for measuring a 96 well plate The session information contains e desktop information e procedure information e results information 1 3 14 Creating a new Session You can create a new application by creating a new Session The session is based on a template The program is supplied with the most common 1 to 384 864 with limitations well plate templates You can always create your own templates by using the Template Editor for more information see Creating your own Session on p 1 42 1 16 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 3 15 Using Help You can launch the Help application by selecting Help Help Contents from the main menu The following Help window will appear E Fluoroskan Help M 1 xi a 5 amp Hide Back Forward Print Contents Index Search Glossary 2 Fluoroskan Ascent 2 Introduction 2 Product Support P Setting up the system 2 gt b Basic concepts Inside the help you can often navigate using the images Click on an area in the image that changes Making applications the cursor into a hand Procedure Desktop menus Standard sheets Click for quick access to some of the help
39. Wak program Stop bits 1 The following Pause Options are available e Send string Sends a string to the serial port when the Pause step starts Wait string Waits for a string from the serial port and continues the execution after it has been received Wait Plate ID string Waits for a string from a barcode reader e Run program Starts a program when the Pause step commences In the Run program option you have to type the name of the program you want to run in the field The name may include path and command line arguments Wait program Waits for the started program to terminate and then continues the execution The option Wait program is available only if you have selected the option Run program Even if one or more of the wait options you have selected are not yet completely executed you can continue manually by clicking the Continue button when the Pause dialog appears A Waiting message is displayed if the Pause step is waiting for a string program or a waiting time If you have selected two or three of the waiting options the execution continues at the first wait end condition e Serial port settings From Serial port settings the user can select the correct communication parameters For Send string and Wait string you have to select the proper serial port Ascent Software User s Guide 2 53 settings in the dialog You cannot send to or receive from the instrument that Ascent Software is cont
40. button while moving the mouse Ascent Software User s Guide 4 135 drop down list box List of options for an entry that appears when you move the cursor to the entry field drop down menu pull down menu A menu that appears on a computer screen when its title often occurring in a menu bar is selected by means of a mouse or other pointing device or an appropriate sequence of keystrokes One or more of the menu options may then be selected in the same way after which the menu will normally vanish edit To create modify or add to a document Editing includes delete insert move copy search replace include another file justify and paginate enable To selectively activate a device function or a value error 1 The difference between a computed observed or measured value or condition and the true specified or theoretically correct value or condition 2 An incorrect result resulting from some failure in the hardware of a system 3 An incorrect step process or data definition in for example a program error message A message that reports the occurrence of an error error routine Any routine within a program that is entered as a result of some error condition having been detected The actions taken by such a routine will be dependent upon the reliability requirements that the program is expected to meet and upon the strategy for error analysis and recovery execute
41. option that can be turned on or off using the same action such as a mouse click 2 To switch back and forth between two states For example the Num Lock key on an IBM style keyboard toggles the numeric keypad between numbers and cursor movement toolbox A set of software tools probably from several vendors not necessarily as closely related or providing as full coverage of the software life cycle as the too kit The set of tools in a toolkit is usually from a single vendor Ascent Software User s Guide 4 151 transformation Transformation of statistics data means a change of scale used to improve the validity of statistical analyses For data in which small values have smaller variance than large values a logarithmic or square root transformation is often recommended For data in the form of proportions a transformation from the scale 0 1 to an infinite scale is advisable before performing analysis of variance or regression analysis Several transformations exist for proportions such as the logistic or log odds ratio that is used in the analysis of generalized linear models Appropriate transformations may be suggested by studying residuals in a regression analysis troubleshootin g or trouble shooting trouble shooting Solving a particular problem related to a project or system truncation The decimals in a calculation are chopped not rounded in other words removal of digits from a numbe
42. the menu and status bars are also changed At the top or bottom of the Procedure Desktop you will find the Parameters Area definition Layout and the RunStatus tabviews With these tabs you can change the page of the desktop View Tabs Bar On Top At the bottom of the Results Desktop the spreadsheet tabviews are located With these tabs you can change the current spreadsheet of the desktop Ascent Software User s Guide 4 127 4 8 7 Steplist Located to the left of the Procedure Desktop Shows the steps selected to the Steplist The right mouse button also allows the selection of steps from the Steplist when the mouse pointer is on the Steplist area 4 9 Glossary and abbreviations active The window or icon that you are currently using or that is currently selected Only one window or icon can be activated at a time Keystrokes and commands and mouse operations affect the active window or icon If a window is active its title bar changes color to differentiate it from other windows If an icon is active its label changes color Windows or icons on the desktop that are not selected are inactive A D or A to D ANALOG TO DIGITAL Changing a signal from an analog form to a digitally coded form A D converter or A D converter analog to digital converter analog to digital converter device used to convert an analog input to a digital output form which can be understood by a computer address 1 The
43. 096 384 Wells GENETIX 384 Wells GENETIX with adapter 384 Wells NUNC N 242757 N 242765 384 Wells GREINER 384 Wells COSTAR 3702 48 Wells CORNING 25830 48 Wells COSTAR 3548 48 Wells NUNC 150687 48 Wells SUMILON 80480 48 Wells IWAKI 3830 048 24 Wells CORNING 25820 24 Wells COSTAR 3524 24 Wells GREINER 662160 24 Wells FALCON 3047 24 Wells NUNC Multidish N 143982 24 Wells SUMILON 80240 24 Wells IWAKI 3820 024 12 Wells CORNING 25815 12 Wells COSTAR 3512 12 Wells NUNC 150628 12 Wells SUMILON 80120 1 38 Ascent Software User s Guide 12 Wells IWAKI 3815 012 6 Wells CORNING 25810 6 Wells COSTAR 3516 6 Wells NUNC Multidish N 152795 6 Wells FALCON 3046 6 Wells GREINER 657160 6 Wells IWAKI 3810 006 Full area Petri dish FALCON with adapter Petri dish COSTAR with adapter Petri dish GREINER with adapter 2 x Petri dish COSTAR with adapter 6 x Petri dish CORNING with adapter 60 Well Terasaki with adapter 72 Well Terasaki with adapter 864 Generic PCR tubes plate with adapter The templates are saved in the TEMPLATE CNF file in the work directory Ascent Software User s Guide 1 39 1 5 9 Results Desktop The Results Desktop module is a spreadsheet type calculator and a grid environment which is used when basic calculations graphic views and reports to the printer screen file or to other programs Clipboard are created It is easy to create new spreadsheets and select them only by clicking the tabview The tabvi
44. 2 68 3 1 3 5 3 6 3 15 3 18 3 77 4 15 4 90 4 101 4 122 4 127 Status Baz d eir ei Pe 2 2 2 10 3 6 3 14 3 15 4 127 gerere 1 43 2 2 2 10 2 11 3 6 3 15 4 124 3 6 3 18 Pe uu 3 6 3 18 Molle treo a Tode da 1 29 2 13 2 44 2 46 2 78 4 120 lideres ig o 3 32 4 153 X ASPERIS UII DEMI 4 11 Y DECEASED 3 67 4 74 4 80 4 138 Yes 13 5 e eode de Fa 3 39 Ascent Software User s Guide XXV xxvi Ascent Software User s Guide 1 Overview 1 1 Introduction Ascent Software is a powerful application which controls the Fluoroskan Ascent FL a combined fluorometer and luminometer and the Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF fluorometers Note that this User s Guide describes functions of all these readers Reader functions that apply only to the Fluoroskan Ascent FL are marked as FL only Note that all the functions for the Fluoroskan Ascent described in this User s Guide also apply to the Fluoroskan Ascent CF with the exception of all information on dispensers and dispensing marked as not CF Ascent Software provides features needed to make comprehensive calculations and reports You can define and run a variety of plates easily A plate information database covers the most common plate formats Ascent Software allows you to build your own applications and to run or modify ready made applications Designing a
45. 2 Open ln Open Session menu or a Use this command to open an existing Session You can only have one session open at a time Change to another session by opening that session 2 4 Ascent Software User s Guide Open Session File Name Directories Calciumd sef c Cellprod sef Cellprol sef B5 Ascent Eyfp sef Eyfpd sef Picogred sef Picogree sef Cancel Network di List Files of Type Drives Session Files SEF In an Open Session dialog box you can type a full filename in the File Name box display selected files in the File Name box by selecting a type from the List Files of Type drop down list box You can also choose files by typing a partial filename with or wildcards in the File Name box and pressing Enter view the contents of different directories by selecting a directory from the Directories list box You can also change directories by typing a directory in the File Name box and pressing Enter view the contents of different drives by selecting one from the Drives drop down list box connect to a network drive by selecting Network Parameters File Name The box lets you enter the name of the file to open or a file specification to limit the files which are displayed in the list box The list box displays the filenames in the current directory that match the file specifications in the box Ascent Software User s Guide 2 5 List
46. 3 3 Tool Bar Tool Bar View menu Along the top of the Desktop window you can see a horizontal strip containing several tools this is the tool bar It offers the most commonly used functions in the menu as tool buttons Although these buttons perform the same functions as their menu counterparts they are more convenient to use 2 10 Ascent Software User s Guide Procedure tool bar Measure Dispense New Save Shake Dispense and Measure Plate In Incubate Pause Print Startrun Plate Out Save Load Use the Tool Bar command in the View menu to display or hide the tool bar 2 1 3 4 Tabs Bar Parameters Area definition Layout Settings Tabs Bar On Top View menu Use this command to display the Tabs Bar either on top of the view or in the bottom of the view 2 1 3 5 Procedure Procedure View menu Use this command to view the Procedure Desktop 2 1 3 6 Results Results View menu Use this command to view the Results Desktop Ascent Software User s Guide 2 11 2 1 4 Execute 2 1 4 1 Procedure Procedure Execute menu or Eram Use this command to run the Session 2 1 4 2 Plate In Plate In Execute menu or X Use this command to drive the plate into the instrument 2 1 4 3 Plate Out Plate Out Execute menu or Ry Use this command to drive the plate out of the instrument 2 1 4 4 Prime not CF Prime Execute menu Use this command to prime the dispensers
47. 3 54 3 55 3 82 4 113 Ratio Inhibition eeeeeeeeeeenenn nnn 3 6 3 62 3 63 3 82 Product Support iere eb eie ie 1 3 Prompt on Replace eite de te feeder ee 3 12 3 33 rr 4 94 4 145 Q Quadratic 3 69 3 70 Quartic 3 69 3 70 R conde doce meae ete pelos EA AEA A Ute UT Ro Redes 3 77 Remote command 4 85 4 86 4 87 4 88 4 89 4 90 4 92 4 93 4 94 control interface iuto itinere artic 4 85 4 87 TUNG OM RR NET TDI UNDIS SUELEN 4 92 eere EE 4 87 E 4 87 1 4 1 5 1 8 4 111 4 136 Response 4 87 4 89 4 90 4 91 4 92 4 93 4 94 4 95 4 96 4 135 4 143 ul 4 89 4 90 formatee 4 95 RODOUCS 4 85 4 89 4 91 RUM plate OUt veh eee eee eee 2 52 Run programmi eee eB 2 b3 RunStatus 1 28 1 40 1 41 2 36 3 3 3 4 3 20 3 24 3 39 3 40 4 127 S Scale 2 62 2 72 3 20 3 23 3 67 3 72 4 81 4 83 4 111 4 152 SCAU 2 63 2 64 2 74 2 75 2 76 Select readirig io e tee 3 61 Select sheet s tO print taaa eene nnne nnne 2 57
48. All Steps Steps menu Automatically prints all steps Displays the Print dialog box where you can select the print options and print the steps Note The appearance of the Print dialog box depends on the operating system used and the printer used 2 58 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 6 Setup 2 1 6 1 Plate Templates Plate Templates Setup menu Use this command to edit Plate Templates The Template Editor allows the user to create delete or modify existing plate templates Setup Plate Templates E nj x Create new delete or modify existing plate templates Ind State Name Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Plate Modify Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Strip Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate w adapter Duplicate Thermo Labsystems Microlite 96 Plate Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE Delete Thermo Labsystems COMBIPLATE n Multiframe Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE Set as default Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE 34 with adapter IGUAL Dynex 96 well Microlite plates 96 Wells GENERIC Show plate 96 Wells CORNING 25860 96 Wells COSTAR 3596 96 Wells NUNC N 167008 96 Wells FALCON 3072 96 Wells FALCON 3075 96 Wells GREINER 655180 96 Wells IWAKI 3860 096 384 Wells GENETIX In the list box the items marked with Enab ed are enabled those marked with Disabled are disabled and the one that is marked with Default is the default definition Note If the well diameter
49. Colors the Procedure Desktop part of the manual Note There are no colors in the Concentration list In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet 3 64 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 9 1 Source Curve fit sheet properties Calibrator source Specifies the source sheet for the calibrators and the assay name of the specific selected Assay in that sheet e Sheet name Specifies the name of the source sheet for the calibrators e Assay name Specifies the assay name for the calibrator source Sample source Specifies the source sheet for the samples and the assay name Ascent Software User s Guide 3 65 e Sheet name Specifies the name of the source sheet for the samples e Assay name Specifies the assay name for the sample source 3 2 8 9 2 Curve Fit Curve fit sheet properties e Extrapolate Automatic extrapolation can be selected Extrapolation generally means the estimation of the value of a function given other values of the function at a point beyond the interval in which the calibrator data lies When Extrapolate is not selected the concentrations of the sample values which are smaller than the 3 66 Ascent Software User s Guide lowest value of the calibrators or greater than the highest value of the calibrators are not calculated If Extrapolate is selected the concentrations are calculated for those measurement values outside the
50. Defines the vertical diagonal of the well to be measured does not apply to Multiskan Nepheloskan or iEMS Prints the current worksheet Prints the currently selected area Creates a new worksheet Deletes the current worksheet Cuts the selected area to the Clipboard Copies the selected area to the Clipboard Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the selected location Zooms in the display at 10 intervals Zooms out the display at 10 intervals Creates a Blank Subtraction sheet Creates a Curve Fit sheet Creates a Cutoff sheet Enables Disables the values in the cells Opens the properties dialog of the sheet Ascent Software User s Guide 4 8 4 Desktops The Desktop is the main window area of the program 4 8 5 Status Bar Displayed at the bottom of the Program window The status bar shows the buttons and menu selection information when the cursor moves over the selections The status bar also contains fixed types of information like the current time and the line state of the instrument To hide or display the status bar choose Status Bar from the View menu ALT V S Status information Example Description Searching for The Reader is not connected to the Program Connected to Reader is connected to the Program 4 8 6 Tab Desktop tabs are located to the right of the active desktop The desktop tab selects the active desktop of the program When the desktop is changed
51. Dispense A1 Measure A1 Dispense B1 Measure B1 etc Measure2 1 8 3 Modifying an existing session You can modify an existing session in the same way as you Created it You can open an existing session by selecting the Open session command from the Session menu 1 8 4 Example applications Some applications are supplied with the program and they are ready for use after some minor changes Note that these sessions are only meant to be read If these are used in your own applications you must save them with your own session name for later use Ascent Software User s Guide 1 47 1 8 5 Running an application from the example applications The steps for running an application from the example applications e Open the session e Make the changes according to your application e Save the session with a new name Now you have a session of your own to run and modify when needed Note You cannot change the defined plate template Note Example files marked with a d are demo applications that cannot be run for example exampled lay Example files without the letter d in the end can be used with the instrument for example example lay 1 48 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 9 Template Editor The Template Editor in the Setup menu allows the user to create and modify plate templates Setup Plate Templates Ec inl x Create new delete or modify existing plate templates nd State Name Therm
52. English United Kingdom before installation of Ascent Software as Ascent Software has been only tested in the English US environment The language settings can be checked and changed in the Regional Settings window Windows 98 Windows Me and Windows NT or in the Regional Options window Windows 2000 Language settings in Windows 98 Windows Me and Windows NT Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings English Language settings in Windows 2000 Start Settings Control Panel Regional Options General English 1 3 4 2 Letters permitted with Ascent Software installation It is only allowed to use the letters a to z and A to Z with Ascent Software Scandinavian letters 6 ae etc or any other non standard letters should not be used with Ascent Software 1 3 4 3 Printer settings Printer default settings should be carried out from the Start Settings Printers window and then Printer Properties icon prior to starting Ascent Software 1 6 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 3 5 Installation of Ascent Software Ascent Software is distributed on CDs To install 1 Exit all open applications and insert the CD into your CD ROM drive If the installation program does not automatically run perform the following steps 2 Click the Start button and select Run 3 In the Open box type your CD ROM drive letter and then type setup For example E setup 4 Click OK an
53. Guide 2 19 2 1 5 2 3 Whole Well Whole Well Area menu or Use this command to define that all the points of the well are to be measured I Parameters Area definition Layout Settings General ae 2 20 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 2 4 Horizontal Diagonal Horizontal Diagonal Area menu or Use this command to define that the horizontal diagonal of the well is to be measured 2 Parameters Area definition Layout Settings esl um Ascent Software User s Guide 2 21 2 1 5 2 5 Vertical Diagonal Vertical Diagonal Area menu or Use this command to define that the vertical diagonal of the well is to be measured E Parameters Area definition Layout Settings General HH H HHH 2 1 5 2 6 Remove Remove Area menu or Use this button to define the tool to Remove wells from the measurement area 2 22 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 3 Layout The Layout function allows the user to specify the data of the wells on the microplate The plate is displayed in the window The floating menu appears by pressing the right mouse button in the Layout window The Layout Editor is used to enter and change the well data The well data can be filled using two different approaches By using the fields and buttons in the Layout Editor the w
54. Page Break 3 6 3 19 Add niii n the hr P rene 3 6 3 19 Row Page Break aicinn cedet esee aici ea 3 6 3 19 Page Setup eite e egre i ode de 3 6 3 19 Print1 17 1 22 1 30 1 41 1 45 2 2 2 8 2 11 2 30 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 71 2 73 2 79 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 19 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 85 4 82 4 97 4 125 Print ARG al o reet rae ce eode is CREER YR CARTER 3 6 3 24 ete 3 6 3 25 Remove Page gt 3 6 3 19 Set Prilt Are3 2 57 3 6 3 24 Print button1 17 1 22 1 30 1 41 1 45 2 2 2 8 2 11 2 30 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 71 2 73 2 79 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 19 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 85 4 82 4 97 4 125 Process Blank Subtraction 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 53 3 77 3 82 4 126 XX Ascent Software User s Guide Curve Fit1 2 1 41 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 15 3 64 3 66 3 69 3 73 3 74 3 75 3 77 3 82 4 99 4 126 Cut Off 1 2 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 15 3 73 3 77 3 80 3 81 3 82 FUIICUION 1 2 3 6 3 41 3 42 3 43 3 44 ETET o eer 1 2 3 3 3 6 3 46 3 47 Kinetic a E 3 6 3 55 3 82 Mu ltipOiFit i otosi 3 6 3 51 3 52 3 82 IS Tre pA om 3 3 3 6 3 47 Precalc lation z iicet aen 3 6
55. QUE ascetur xii cea eri uet e e v RN 3 18 3 2 4 9 Proced re re OO oe CU er UN ERU UR d 3 18 3 2 4 10 Result8 tete ettet d dete E ERA 3 18 3 2 5 3 19 3 2 5 1 Add Page Break esee 3 19 3 2 5 2 Add Col Page 2 8 8 00 3 19 3 2 5 3 Add Row Page 1 3 19 3 2 5 4 Remove Page 3 19 3 2 5 5 tetas 3 19 3 2 5 6 vae ERU 3 24 3 2 5 7 tee Edid e 3 24 3 2 5 8 Print Set p 3 25 3 2 5 9 note 3 26 3 2 6 iE 3 27 3 2 6 1 E 3 27 3 2 6 2 elm TELS 3 28 3 2 6 3 E Fed nh 3 30 3 2 6 4 Alignment eoe 3 31 Ascent Software User s Guide vii 3 2 6 5 3 33 3 2 7 ER 3 34 3 2 7 1 New Sheet 3 34 3 2 7 2 Open Sheet 2 2 3 35 3 2 7 3 Save 3 36 3 2 7 4 SaveSheet AS eni deti 3 37 3 2 7 5 Advanced eee 3 38 3 2 7 6 Delete Sheet A sds scite 3
56. Set as default Sets the currently selected template as the default template which is offered first to the user when a new session is created e Show plate Shows the plate layout of the currently selected template When you press the Modify template button the Template Parameters dialog appears This dialog is used when the parameters of the plate definition are modified Note Modifications in a plate template valid only from Session New 1 10 Managing files 1 10 1 Opening and saving Sessions This module allows the user to load an old session from the disk according to the filename and to save the session using the old or a new name If you want to use your application in any other environment note that one session consists of four files sef Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF or sec Fluoroskan Ascent FL vtg vtb and lay Refer to chapter File types used in Ascent Software in the Reference part of the manual Note 1 50 If you start a program without the command line argument session name the default session name is DEFAULT SEF for Fluoroskan Ascent Fluoroskan Ascent CF DEFAULT SEC for Fluoroskan Ascent FL When you create a new session the default name session name is NONAME SEF for Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent for Fluoroskan Ascent FL until you save it with a new name Ascent Software User s Guide 1 10 2 F
57. The data extends up to 12 columns gt Ascent Software User s Guide 4 89 When the remote cmd file has been detected and read by Ascent Software the file is deleted from the directory Now it is possible to write copy another file in this directory inquiring e g for the state of Ascent Software STATE continue after a Pause step CONTINUE launch a new plate with the same or different session START etc Finally you can exit Ascent Software by sending a KILL command file Note By default if the response file already exists the file is overwritten The START command can have optional parameters such as APPEND That means that the output file is appended and not overwritten Another option is a PLATEID followed with a plate identification code If this option is used the plate identification code is added to the response file You can also save individual sheets from the Results Desktop This is handy when you have predefined report sheets Then the command file can look like this START PLATEID 12345 APPEND c ascento remote sec c ascento response txt results c ascento results txt Untitled Notepad OF x File Edit Search Help START c ascent remote sec c ascent response txt results C XascentXresults txt where the Results sheet is your report sheet 4 90 Ascent Software User s Guide Note Be sure to write the sheet name exactly in the same way as in your session since the s
58. The duration time of the total Shake step e ON time hh mm ss The ON time of the shaking period The ON time must always be given so that the instrument will shake The other shake parameters mentioned are just for the fine tuning of the instrument e OFF time hh mm ss The OFF time of the shaking period The Shake step is broken up into intermittent ON and OFF times Ascent Software User s Guide 2 49 e Diameter 1 50 mm Defines the shaking amplitude e Speed 60 1200 rpm Defines the shaking speed e Background mode The shaking is carried out when the instrument does not have any other tasks to perform e g during lag times Note Different time settings will affect the way the program performs tasks Examples of setting up time parameters 1 Interval shaking If for example the Total time equals 30 s the ON time 10 s and the OFF time 5 s then the instrument shakes 10s gt isidlebs X shakes 10 5 isidle5s total 30 s 2 Background shake in a kinetic measurement a Shaking would normally start as soon as the instrument is idle i e right after the measurement if the OFF time equals zero If you want the shaking to commence at a set time before the measurement and wait the remaining interval time before the next kinetic measurement then setting the Total time is not necessary The ON time equals the length of time the instrument shakes before the measurement The OFF time has to be set greater than
59. The following control characters have a special meaning amp L Left alignment amp C Center amp R Right amp D Date amp T Time amp F Sheet name amp P Page number amp N Total number of pages Margins Top Select the distance between your data and the top edge of the printed page The default value is 1 0 cm Bottom Select the distance between your data and the bottom edge of the printed page If your data is less than a page long it will not expand to extend to the bottom margin The default value is 1 0 cm Left Select the distance between your data and the left edge of the printed page The default value is 0 75 cm Right Select the distance between your data and the right edge of the printed page If your data is less than a page wide it will not expand to extend to the right margin The default value is 0 75 cm Ascent Software User s Guide Note All the margins are usually slightly over the set values due to printer properties e Page Order Controls the order in which your data is numbered and printed when it does not fit onto one page Top To Bottom Numbering and printing proceed from the first page to the pages below and then move to the right and continue printing down Left To Right Numbering and printing proceed from the first page to the pages to the right and then move down and continue printing across the page e Center Centers the data on the page within the margins vertically horizo
60. User s Guide 4 4 Remote Control Interface Ascent Software enables integration with robotics and HIS LIMS systems by using the Remote Control Interface The execution of predefined assays can be controlled remotely by changing files between Ascent Software and the host system Ascent Software is started with an additional R command flag which indicates to Ascent Software that it needs to start monitoring a file named REMOTE CMD in its own working directory Click on your Ascent Software icon with the right mouse button select Properties Shortcut and add the R command flag as illustrated below e g C Ascento APPFWG1 EXE DC R Ascent Software User s Guide 4 85 Ascent Software for Fluoroskan Ascent FL Properties 21 xi C Ascent APPFWG1 EXE DC R c Ascent Normal window When you start Ascent Software you will see on top of the Ascent window a text similar to the following Ascent Software Version 2 5 DEFAULT SEC In Remote Control which now indicates that the software is monitoring the REMOTE CMD file to exist in its directory in this example the C ASCENTO directory Create a simple session and give it the name remote sec Note Use the correct session filename extensions In the example below sec has been used for the Fluoroskan Ascent FL session files 4 86 Ascent Software User s Guide Use sed for the Multiskan Ascent session files see for the iEMS Ascent session files s
61. User s Guide 2 27 e Navigate You can move on the microplate in different directions and select a desired well with the Navigate arrows e Apply Applies the data to the wells according to the field entries e Close Closes the Fill dialog e Clear Removes the data from the fields of the selected well and its replicates and specific blanks e Clear all Removes the data from all the wells Only empty wells can be filled with the Fill dialog Select the type of well from the drop down list and enter the name of the item The additional parameters depend on the type of item 2 28 Ascent Software User s Guide You can enter the concentration for calibrators You can enter the dilution 1 n for samples The name of the field is automatically Concentration for calibrators and Dilution 1 for samples Enter the name of the assay with the Assay field The maximum length of the assay name is 20 characters The filling order of the items can be selected with the Filling order buttons either down or across Key in the number of replicates The maximum number of replicates is 30 Calibrators controls and samples have no specific blank as default Then the value in the Specific blanks field is None Select One if the item has one specific blank Select Two if the item has two specific blanks The filling order of replicates and blanks can be selected by using the Fill replicates and blanks buttons either
62. all keywords to find a specific topic e Search Find a specific help topic by entering words to search in the help content Note Many images in the help application contain links to topics When you see an image move the cursor across the image to find the links Ascent Software User s Guide 3 85 3 86 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 Reference 4 1 Keyboard guide 4 1 1 General keys The tables in this section list the keyboard commands you can use when working in a desktop environment The following table lists action keys which allow you to use menus select items enter and delete data Menus Key Description ALT F10 Activates the menu bar ALT underlined character in the menu name Selects a menu An arrow key ENTER Selects a menu command ALT SPACEBAR Opens the Control menu Underlined character in menu Executes the menu command Ascent Software User s Guide 4 1 4 1 2 Dialogs and text lines Key ENTER ALT up down arrow Escape ALT F4 An arrow key TAB SHIFT TAB CTRL an arrow key HOME END BACKSPACE DEL CTRL C CTRL X CTRL V CTRL Z ALT BACKSPACE 4 2 Description Carries out a command Opens or closes a selected list Cancels a dialog Moves between menu commands characters in a text box or items in a list Moves to the next or previous dialog box item Moves one word right or left in a text box Moves to the beginning or end of a line or list Deletes the character to
63. along the left or right margin or centered between the margins In the latter case the space between words and or letters is increased until the line fills the distance between the margins If the spacing is excessive it can be reduced by rewriting or by hyphenating words at the ends of lines LCD or LC display liquid crystal display LF line feed Ascent Software User s Guide 4 139 library There are various different libraries i e program library link library DLL optical disk library tape library and session library A program or software library is a collection of programs and packages that are made available for common use within some environment individual items need not be related A typical library might contain compilers utility programs packages for mathematical operations etc Usually it is only necessary to reference the library program to cause it to be automatically incorporated in a user s program LIMS Acronym for Laboratory Information Management System list A set of words numbers etc written one below the other One distinguishes between the head tail of a list as well as a null list or empty list The items in list can be arbitrary in nature unless stated otherwise In particular it is possible for an item to be in another list in which case it is known as a sublist If a list has one or more sublists it is called a st structure If it has no sublists i
64. and in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual Parameters Area definition Layout Settings mpa J rion E we SE oen ICALIBR Cal 2 10 000 1 ICALIBR LE G m 000 ICALIBR 100 000 1 E Ascent Software User s Guide 1 25 1 5 5 1 3 Settings Parameters Area definition Layout Settings Instrument settings Dispenser speed settings Moving type mJy Dispenser 1 1 100 Execute by 1 96 wells 96 Dispenser 2 1 100 Dispense all and measure UE Plate acceleration o Settle delay 0 10000ms Blanking time 0 100 pt AT ee The instrument settings are e Moving type The program searches for wells to dispense measure in the order defined by this input field If the Moving type has been selected as above the columns may not actually be measured in opposite directions unless adjacent columns are selected If a well has several measurement points defined the points within the well are measured using the same Moving type as defined for the wells Execute by 1 n wells The Execute by 1 n wells setting defines the size of a group of wells As many wells as defined by this field are dispensed measured at a time The default group size is the number of wells on the plate which means that all the wells are dispensed measured in one pass of the session
65. by Procedure Desktop Setup Printout e Header The area in the Header box shows you the contents of the header e Footer The area in the Footer box shows you the contents of the footer The following control characters have a special meaning amp L Left alignment amp C Center amp R Right amp D Date amp T Time amp F Sheet name amp P Page number amp N Total number of pages e Margins Top Select the distance you want between your data and the top edge of the printed page The default value is 1 cm Bottom Select the distance you want between your data and the bottom edge of the printed page If your data is less than a page long it will not expand to extend to the bottom margin The default value is 1 cm Left Select the distance you want between your data and the left edge of the printed page The default value is 0 75 cm Ascent Software User s Guide 3 21 Right Select the distance you want between your data and the right edge of the printed page If your data is less than a page wide it will not expand to extend to the right margin The default value is 0 75 cm Note All the margins are usually slightly over the set values due to printer properties e Page Order Controls the order in which your data is numbered and printed when it does not fit onto one page Top To Bottom Numbering and printing proceed from the first page to the pages below and then move to the right and continue pr
66. by commas The list can contain numbers logical values text representations of numbers or reference to a range containing those values Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors If a range reference is included in the list text logical expressions and empty cells in the range are ignored AVERAGE COUNT COUNTA and SUMSQ functions SUM 1000 2000 3000 returns 6000 SUM A10 D10 returns 4000 when each cell in the range contains 1000 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 91 SUMSQ Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 92 T Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Squares each of the supplied numbers and returns the sum of the squares SUMSO number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers logical values text representations of numbers or a reference to a range containing those values Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors If a range reference is included in the list text logical expressions and empty cells in the range are ignored SUM function SUMSQ 9 10 11 returns 302 Tests the supplied value and returns the value if itis text T va ue The va ue is the value one wishes to test Empty text is returned for any value that is not text N and VALUE functions T Report returns Report T A4 returns empty te
67. character position where the search begins If the number you specify is less than 0 or greater than the number of characters in the text the VALUE is returned Omitting this argument assumes a starting position of 1 The text is searched from left to right starting from the position specified The search is not case sensitive If the text does not contain the search string the VALUE is returned FIND MID REPLACE and SUBSTITUTE functions SEARCH 5 Bin b45 returns 6 SEARCH b Bin b45 4 returns 5 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 55 4 2 2 82 SECOND Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 83 SIGN Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples 4 56 Returns the second that corresponds to the supplied date SECOND seria _number The seria _number is the time expressed as a serial number The decimal portion of the number represents the time as a fraction of the day DAY HOUR MINUTE MONTH NOW WEEKDAY and YEAR functions SECOND 259 returns 58 SECOND 34657 904 returns 46 Determines the sign of the specified number SIGN number The number is any number The SIGN returns 1 if the specified number is positive 1 if itis negative and 0 if it is 0 ABS function SIGN 123 returns 1 SIGN 123 returns 1 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 84 SIN Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 85 SINH Description Syntax See Als
68. contains the desired data 3 62 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 8 2 Ratio Inhibition Properties Ratio Inhibition sheet properties Creates a Ratio Inhibition sheet The user can select either Ratio i e or Inhibition i e 100 B B The user selects the source for B from the layout well types and names The mean value of the sample selected if replicates do exist will be used in further calculations The user can also select the maximum value of the specified type through the Use maximum value selection Ascent Software User s Guide 3 63 3 2 8 9 Curve Fit Curve Fit Process menu Creates a Curve Fit sheet calculates the curve fitting and the concentration of the samples Note The Curve Fit requires that calibrators have either been defined in the plate layout or that calibrators have been loaded from a file Any modification in the sheet properties will erase user modifications Enable Disable information or any other added information However added information stays in the two comment columns in the concentration list as well as the comment wells wells H4 H7 at the top of the Curve Fit spreadsheet The colors of the names of the specimen in the Curve Fit sheet Layout map matrix Source data matrix and Calculated concentrations matrix are the same as the defined colors of the different well types i e calibrators controls blanks and samples see Section Setup
69. field and the value in the By field The filling order of the item in the series can be selected with the Filling order buttons either down or across Navigate enables the user to move on the microplate in different directions and select a desired well with the Navigate arrows Press the Apply button to apply the data to the well s Only empty wells are filled reserved wells are not overwritten Press the Close button when you want to close the Fill dialog Press the Clear button to remove data from the fields of the selected well and its replicates and specific blanks Press the Clear all button when you want to empty all the data of the wells on the plate Note user can get a printout of the plate layout in Steps Print Current Step 2 30 Ascent Software User s Guide Activeness of fields The Type field can be selected when the plate contains at least one empty well The editability of fields depends on the selection in the Type field The Name field can be edited when the type is not BLANK The Load IDs button is active when type is SAMPLE The Concentration field can be edited when the type is CALIBR The Dilution 1 field can be edited when the type is SAMPLE The Assay Filling order and Replicates fields can always be changed The Specific blanks field can be selected when the type is not BLANK The Fill replicates and blanks buttons can be selected when there is more than one replicate or specific
70. file START session2 sec response txt To demonstrate and test different remote commands it is recommended to remote cmd files which different commands in folders of their own By copying files in the right order it is possible to show the effect of different commands 6 Exploring Abort _ Of x File Edit View Tools Help 2274 X 9 Back Forward Up Cut Copy Paste Undo Delete Properties Views Address ja C Ascent RemoteAbort z Links gt Folders i EC Ascent 1KB CMD File 18401202 16 08 B Remote Abort C Cont a Response Stat xl 4 gt 1 object s 83 bytes Disk free space 4 70GB Computer 2 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 93 4 5 Computer control commands 4 5 1 Remote commands of the Ascent Instrument The Ascent Instrument connected to a PC uses the serial port 1 4 The baud rate is 9600 with 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity XON XOFF software handshaking is used 4 5 2 Protocol All data is transferred in case sensitive ASCII lines The end character of the command and response lines is lt CR gt and lt LF gt or all possible combinations thereof CR LF CR LF LF CR The maximum length of the command or response line is 200 characters 4 5 3 Command format The command line contains 3 unique header characters parameters and end character s The header characters a
71. file types 4 122 4 8 Parts of the 4 123 4 8 1 Generalis e e ERR C tans 4 123 xii Ascent Software User s Guide 4 8 2 Menu 4 124 4 8 3 TOOL teilte epo 4 124 4 8 4 Desktops iie ahaa udin 4 127 4 8 5 Status Bari eeu ea diio aem 4 127 4 8 6 4 127 4 8 7 StepliS n 4 128 4 9 Glossary and 4 128 Ascent Software User s Guide xiii 2 2 D uetus detecte blu d 4 72 4 74 4 75 4 79 3 CDM UTER 4 73 4 74 4 75 4 79 4 80 4 84 ertt tema 4 84 amp 4 128 4 141 Activeness of layout fields 2 000000 2 31 1 30 2 52 All button1 1 1 23 1 44 1 51 2 2 2 13 2 14 2 58 2 66 2 71 3 9 3 12 3 17 3 22 3 34 3 38 3 58 3 71 4 12 4 45 4 50 4 76 4 88 4 94 4 95 Ambient temperature essen 2 48 2 77 4 128 APPENA EET 2 55 Apply button 1 33 1 35 2 25 2 26 2 28 2 30 2 31 3 2 3 52 3 83 Area definition Horizontal Diagonal ege aede Eaa 2 21 Middle Poin
72. for e Current Cell Data Displays the searched data and cell position e Replace Replaces the searched characters in the active cell with the new characters e Replace All Finds and Replaces every occurrence of the characters in the Find What text box with the characters in the Replace text box e Selected Area Finds and Replaces in the selected area e Whole Sheet Finds and Replaces in the whole sheet e Prompt on Replace Asks to confirm the replacement Shortcut Ctrl H 3 12 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 3 10 Go To Cell Go To Cell Edit menu Use this command to go to a given worksheet address The Go To command can occasionally be seen in the Goto GOTO format Goto Cancel x _ Cancel Goes to the specified cell 3 2 3 11 Enable Disable E Enable Disable Edit menu or Hol Enables or disables the value in a selected cell Enable Disable E D only affects the current sheet and the property is not inherited to other processed sheets exception disabling of Blank in blank subtraction sheet and measurement values in Measure sheets containing more than one measurement point per well In case of erroneous measurements values can be disabled With regard to replicates as well as blanks standards and samples it is possible to disable e g one value out of five measurement values and calculate the results based on these four remaining values On the other hand when a value is enabled i
73. for fast kinetic reactions total reaction time ca lt 20 s that measures the well a defined number of times In the Monitor measurement type one well at a time is measured When you dispense into a well and want to follow fast reactions Monitor is the correct choice After the well has been measured the instrument continues to the next well Fluorometric z lt 2o A specific parameter for this measurement type is e Meas count 1 1000 Total number of readings taken from the points Ascent Software User s Guide 2 43 2 1 5 7 Dispense not CF Dispense Steps menu or Use this command to add a Dispense step to the Steplist The parameters for the Dispense step are e Step name The name of the step The name is generated automatically or given by the user and must be unique e Step time hh mm ss s The time spent before continuing to the next step e Volume 1 2 1000 Defines the dispensing volume in steps of 1 ul increments Note The resolution of the dispensing volume is 1 ul but the accuracy of the dispensers is not as precise Refer to the instrument manual for deatails on dispenser specificatios e Interval hh mm ss s Defines the dispensing time interval between the wells 2 44 Ascent Software User s Guide Prime tip 5 ul Primes 5 ul to the waste wells after each aspiration With small dispensing volumes this improves the dispensing precision of the fir
74. incubate step with an Incubation time of zero e End of the Steplist The following rules apply when a session is executed e The execution of a session starts from the step following the General step until a loop is started Several steps such as Dispense and Measure can belong to a loop The execution of the loop continues until an end loop step is encountered The execution returns to the first step of the loop without running the end loop step e Not until all the points wells are dispensed and or measured is the end loop step executed This sequence is repeated until all the steps of the session are executed e The end loop step breaks the loop and a new step with its own area method and settings parameters can be added e Sheet Save steps are not executed until all the other steps of the session have been completed 1 46 Ascent Software User s Guide The example below performs an assay where two pairs of dispensing and measurement have been looped into two separate loops General Step Execute by setting 1 Repeats steps Dispense1 and Measure1 Dispensel for all wells selected in the Area definition Loop 1 Dispense A1 Measure A1 Dispense B1 lb Measure B1 etc Measurel End Loop 2 Incubate step with zero time to end the Step Incubatet first loop Dispense2 Repeats steps Dispense2 and Measure2 Loop 2 for all wells selected in the Area definition lb
75. is lt 3 mm e g 864 well plates then dispensing cannot be performed since the precision of the instrument is not sufficient Note Dispensing into Terasaki plates cannot be performed due to the shape of the well Ascent Software User s Guide 2 59 The operation buttons are e Modify You can start to modify the selected template e Duplicate Makes a copy of a currently selected template You can create a new template by copying the currently selected one modifying the template parameters and by saving it with a new name e Delete Deletes the currently selected template after verifying that you actually want to delete the template e Set as default Sets the currently selected template to the default template which is offered first to the user when a new Session is created e Show plate Shows the plate layout of the currently selected template When you press the Modify template button Template Parameters Labsystems CLINIPLATE Note The size unit is 1 10 mm 2 60 Ascent Software User s Guide The following parameters are entered for the templates Name Define the name of the template The name is added to the template list Enabled You can enable disable templates in the template list by clicking the Enabled check box Plate size X 1 1340 Defines the plate length in the X direction Plate size Y 1 900 Defines the plate length in the Y direction Plate height 1 240 Def
76. is not found from the plate layout Actions Change the sheet properties Create a layout in the layout editor Run the session Set the existing sheet to the source sheet Set the source sheet name in the sheet properties Refer to Windows Help Try changing the name of the sheet Change the name Create a new source sheet Create a new source sheet Try different sheet names Give the sheet an unique name Modify the sheet properties Create new source sheets Check the well type Double check the typing Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e At least two enabled calibrators required e Calibrators measurement values are identical or missing e There is something else than a number in the source table Reason There are less than 2 calibrators in the layout of the source sheet The Curve Fit sheet is created before the measurements are done The Curve Fit sheet failed to perform the calculation 4 6 4 File input output Message e Cannot find the FILENAME Out of disk space e Unable to read the file FILENAME from the disk e Unable to write the file FILENAME on the disk Reason The specified filename is not found The disk is full The specified file is not found or the disk is damaged The disk may be damaged Ascent Software User s Guide Actions Add the number of calibrators in the layout Executing
77. is selected the calculated value is an integral over the defined integration time This numerical value is dependent of the integration time so that when the integration time increases the value will increase correspondingly 3 2 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 1 1 2 Curves Measure1 runtime Curves are automatically created if Create Kinetic Curves sheet is selected in the Measure step with the measurement types Kinetic Dual kinetic and Monitor See the Procedure Desktop part of the manual for more details The Curves sheet contains a constant picture of the runtime kinetic curves and the picture cannot be edited afterwards More flexible pictures can however be created with Process Organize and Process Graph features see pp 3 47 and 3 46 3 1 1 3 Steps This sheet is updated automatically when a measurement is carried out This sheet has all the step parameters defined on the Procedure Desktop The summary of the plate layout can also be found here 3 1 1 4 RunStatus This sheet is updated automatically when a measurement is carried out This sheet provides general information about the last run such as the session name program versions and information about possible warnings and errors during the measurement See the Procedure Desktop part of the manual for more details 3 1 2 Basic operations 3 1 2 1 Sheet names Sheets created with the Process menu are named automatically However sheet names can be ch
78. item in the series Replicates You can enter the number of replicates of the item Specific blanks You can select the number of specific blanks Fill replicates and blanks You can select the filling order of the replicates and blanks Number of samples controls You can key in the number of samples or controls when samples and controls are edited The names of samples and controls are generated automatically by adding a running number to the name Generate concentration dilution series You can tick this check box when you want to generate calibration or dilution series No of calibrators dilutions You can choose how many dilutions of each sample are made or how many calibrators are used Operators Multiply Divide Subtract You select the operator used in the calculation of concentrations in calibration series and in the calculation of dilutions in sample dilution series By You can choose the value used in the calculation of concentrations in calibration series and in the calculation of dilutions in sample dilution series Navigate You can move on the microplate in different directions and select a desired well with the Navigate arrows The operation buttons are Apply Applies the data in the fields to the wells e Close Closes the Fill box Ascent Software User s Guide 1 35 Clear Removes the data from the fields of the selected well and its rep
79. luminometric method FL only The following measurement types with their own parameters are Single Dual Kinetic 2 46 Ascent Software User s Guide Dual kinetic Scanning Monitor e Overwrite general step settings By checking this check box you can define the area and the plate layout for this step different from those defined in the General step When Overwrite general step settings is selected the area definition layout and the settings of the General step are used as default for the current step These parameters can however be edited suitable for the step in question 2 1 5 9 Incubate Incubate Steps menu or Use this command to add an Incubate step to the Steplist Parameters General 0 step name Incubate b Incubation time hh mm ss 00 00 00 Measurel Temperature 37 0 C Ambient temperature 45 C The parameters of the Incubate step are e Step name The name of the step The name is generated automatically and must be unique e Incubation time hh mm ss Defines the time before the next step is executed If the value is zero the incubation is switched on and the execution of the next step starts immediately Ascent Software User s Guide 2 47 Note To switch the incubation off add an Incubate step and set the Temperature to Ambient temperature amb temp e Temperature You can set the incubation temperature by sliding the temperature regulator from ambien
80. multiwell capability allows the instrument to read a wide range of plate formats A template database covers the most common 1 to 384 well plates When needed it can also be programmed to read nonstandard plate formats Special sample vessels e g Petri dishes and Terasaki plates can also be measured using suitable adapters provided by Thermo Labsystems Ascent Software User s Guide 1 41 1 8 Making applications You can create your own session or modify ready made example sessions which are supplied with the program 1 8 1 Creating your own Session You can make a new application by creating a new Session The session is based on a plate template The program is supplied with a template database covering the most common plates You can always create your own templates using the Template Editor Plate Templates 1 8 1 1 Selecting the Template Select New from the Session menu and choose a plate template from the template list 1 8 1 2 General step The General step covers the general parameters the area definition and the plate layout The Parameters tabview is active and you can type your name in the User name text box and comments in the Comment remark box 1 8 1 3 Selecting the measurement area By selecting the Area definition tabview you will see the template layout and you can define wells to be measured Black dots indicate possible measurement points You can select the Area definition tool from the tabview and mar
81. offset Attempt to set an incubation temperature that is out of range During startup the gains 1 10 100 and 1000 are fitted together If this process fails the error is reported The dispenser failed to carry out the initialization The dispenser received an unknown command An invalid dispenser command parameter The order of the commands to the dispenser is invalid The dispenser firmware checksum does not match the calculated checksum The dispenser cannot execute commands before it is initialized Actions Contact service If the allowed stepper offset range is not large enough there is a mechanical error Contact service Use temperature set values within the allowed range Contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message Dispenser plunger overload e Dispenser valve overload e Dispenser plunger move not allowed e Too many dispenser commands Dispenser timeout e Autocalibration validity expired e Unable to keep up with the requested timing e high signal the measurement channel is saturated e Instrument measurement result range overflow e high instrument background s
82. offset is not changed Invalid set value in the TEM command or the option not installed During startup the A D converter is tested by connecting the input to the signal ground This should produce a near zero signal with both gains x1 and x10 If the signal is not within the limits this error is reported During autocalibration or measurement the signal measured through the air blank hole is too low This may have several reasons but the most likely one is that the lamp has failed The serial number must be 1 to 20 characters long Ascent Software User s Guide Actions This error may be reported after the OFF command which is not used during normal operation Leave the use of the OFF command to a service person This error should never appear if the instrument is used in the standalone mode or through the Ascent PC software Contact service if the error persists Check replace the lamp Contact service if the error persists This error should never appear if the instrument is used in the standalone mode or through the Ascent PC software Continued 4 105 Message e Missing filter optics error e Lamp not ready e Invalid filter s in step STEPNAME e plate is too high for the Multiskan Ascent The maximum height is 15 mm 4 106 Reason During autocalibration a suitable lamp voltage for each filter is adjusted If the resulting voltage is very low it is very like
83. onto several lines Recalculates a worksheet Clears the current selection or deletes the current record Cancels the current data entry or editing operation If you are not editing and are currently in a database row it refreshes the current database row The following table lists the movement keys that allow you to move the active cell within a worksheet and display different sections of the worksheet Ascent Software User s Guide 4 3 Key Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow CTRL Up Down Left Right Page Up Page Down CTRL Page Up CTRL Page Down Home End CTRL Home CTRL End 4 4 Description Moves the active cell one row up Moves the active cell one row down Moves the active cell one column left Moves the active cell one column right Moves to the next range of cells containing data If there is no additional data in the direction in which you are moving it moves to the edge of the worksheet Moves one screen up Moves one screen down Moves one screen left Moves one screen right Goes to the first column of the current row Goes to the last column of the current row that contains data Goes to row 1 column 1 Goes to the last row and column that contains data Ascent Software User s Guide The following table lists the keys that modify the action of the movement keys Key Scroll lock SHIFT plus any movement key Description Causes the worksheet windo
84. or fluorometric can be defined for each measurement step Every measurement and dispense step may have a specific area definition settings and plate layout In that case you have to click Overwrite general step settings and define the area settings and layout Ascent Software User s Guide 1 21 The Steps are General General b Measurel Dispense lj Dispense And Measure Dispense Dispense And Measure Incubatet Incubate Shake Shake Pausel Pause SavelLoadl Save Load Printi Print 1 22 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 5 5 1 General step The General step is always the first step in the Steplist The General step defines the values for the common parameters of all the steps e Plate template The selected plate template e User name The name of the user e Comment A general comment e Lock A session specific password can be added All the common parameters are printed in the worksheet named Steps on the Results Desktop Ascent Software User s Guide 1 23 1 5 5 1 1 Area definition You can define the area for the measurement and dispense steps The measurement wells can be selected from a variety of options For more information see Area definition on p 1 30 and in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 24 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 5 5 1 2 Layout You can give a layout for the measurement steps For more information see Layout on p 1 32
85. prepared to give the following information e Version number and serial number of your Ascent Software e Instrument internal software version EPROM e The type of environment that you are using o Windows version number and language Computer name and model Processor type Physical RAM in MB Video resolution colors and card type e The exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen e What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred e How you tried to solve the problem e The Instrument Status report e Instrument serial number e Options installed in your instrument Ascent Software User s Guide 1 3 1 3 Getting started 1 3 1 System hardware requirements The following equipment is required to run the program e IBM PC compatible computer with Pentium processor SVGA 1024 x 768 display e 64 MB of free RAM available e 200 MB of free hard disk space available e CD ROM drive e Parallel port for the printer e Windows compatible printer e Windows compatible mouse port or second serial port and mouse e Free serial port for the instrument buffered 16550AF The printer is a standard printer that can be configured to the Windows system The printer is connected to the computer via the Centronics parallel port LPT1 or LPT2 1 3 2 Instrument hardware requirements Check that the embedded software EPROM is compatible with the Ascent Software ver
86. pressed the Abort button An unusual error has occurred in the instrument An unusual problem has occurred in the instrument Ascent Software User s Guide Actions Ensure that the name of the sheet is typed correctly Ensure that the name of the file and path are correct Define the measurement area in the area definition window Ensure that the name of the sheet is typed correctly Change the name of the Measure step Actions Try to type the input value according to the default value by using the same type of characters Contact your local Labsystems representative Contact your local Labsystems representative 4 101 4 6 8 Reader type related Message e Wrong measurement method Cannot load a SESSIONNAME session Reason The Reader is not able to carry out this method i e the Reader is not correctly configured There is a version conflict between Ascent Software and the stored Session Actions Use only measurement methods that can be performed by the Reader Use only sessions that are made with the current Reader and the current software version 4 6 9 Multiskan Ascent related Message e instrument received an unknown command e high instrument background signal e Automatic stepper offset adjustment failed e Cannot shake with the given shake parameters 4 102 Reason The command is not recognized or has an invalid para
87. selected wells have the same type of CALIBR or SAMPLE the same name and the same concentration or dilution B Open the Fill dialog by pressing the Fill button The Fill dialog contains the following buttons and fields e Type The type of well is either CALIBR CONTROL SAMPLE or BLANK e Name The name of the item corresponds to that in the Layout Editor The name Blank is allowed only with the type BLANK The maximum length of the name is generally 50 characters with the exception of the type BLANK Ascent Software automatically numbers different items concentrations and dilutions in series This number is added as an extension to the name given by the user The numbering of the samples in the dilution series has a space a running number a slash and a running dilution number The user can give a name maximum 50 characters for the type SAMPLE Depending on the characters used the whole name should be visible in the well data if the length of the name is 9 to 10 characters or less in layout and 9 characters in cell including running number and dilution Otherwise the whole name is only displayed in the Name field and the first 9 to 10 characters are displayed in the well 2 26 Ascent Software User s Guide Load IDs only with SAMPLE type Loads a list of names from a text file where names are separated by an enter 1 i e all the names are on their own lines 1 1 2 1 Name34 etc C
88. series in the legend Additionally any formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart Any formatting applied to the second and third columns is ignored 4 76 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 3 3 13 Hi Lo charts Hi lo charts are most commonly used to show stock market information However these chart types can also be applied to scientific data such as indicating changes in readings over a period of time The vertical Y axis shows the values and the horizontal X axis shows the categories or dates The Program supports a number of variations of the hi lo charts These include hi lo close with the close marker crossing the data point or extending to the right of the data point open hi lo close and open hi lo close bar The data in the data grid must be organized appropriately for each variation of the hi lo chart A hi lo chart requires two columns for each data series the first column is used for the high point and the second is used for the low point A hi lo close chart requires three columns for each data series the first column is used for the high point the second for the low point and the third for the closing point An open hi lo close or an open hi lo close bar chart sometimes called candlestick charts requires four columns of data for each data series the first column is used for the opening point the second for the high point the third for the low point and the fourth for
89. sine of a number ASINH number The number is any number ACOSH ASIN ATANH and SINH functions ASINH 5 3 returns 2 37 ASINH 4 returns 2 09 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 8 Description Returns the arctangent of a number Syntax ATAN number The number is the tangent of the angle Remarks The resulting angle is returned in radians ranging from 2 to 1 2 To find the result in degrees multiply the result by 180 See Also ATAN2 ATANH PI and TAN functions Examples ATAN 3 5 returns 1 29 ATAN 4 returns 1 33 4 2 2 9 ATAN2 Description Returns the arctangent of the specified coordinates Syntax ATANZ2 x y x is the x coordinate y is the y coordinate Remarks The arctangent is the angle from the x axis to a line with endpoints at the origin 0 0 and a point with the given coordinates x y The angle is returned in radians ranging from to excluding See Also ATAN ATANH PI and TAN functions Examples ATAN2 3 6 returns 1 11 ATAN2 1 1 returns 3 04 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 11 4 2 2 10 ATANH Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number ATANH number The number is a number between 1 and 1 excluding 1 and 1 ACOS ASINH and TANH functions ATANH 5 returns 55 ATANH 25 returns 26 4 2 2 11 AVERAGE 4 12 Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the av
90. steps If the group size is less than the total number of wells on the plate the steps of the session are repeatedly run until all the selected wells are dispensed measured Suppose that you have a 96 well plate and have selected all the wells Setting Execute by 1 n wells to 8 means that the steps are repeated 12 times and 8 wells are measured at each pass e Dispense all and measure not CF If Dispense all and measure is selected all the wells defined e g by Execute by 1 96 wells will be 1 26 Ascent Software User s Guide dispensed and after that the defined wells will be measured If Dispense all and measure is not ticked the instrument dispenses and measures one well at a time before moving on to the next one Plate acceleration 1 10 Defines the acceleration used for plate movements Acceleration can be varied between setting 1 0 05 m s and setting 10 0 5 m s The highest acceleration can be used for small wells such as on the 96 well plate Lower accelerations are used for larger wells as default values With high viscosity or solid samples e g agar higher than default acceleration speeds can be used The acceleration setting also affects the maximum speed of the plate the lower the acceleration the lower the plate speed Settle delay 0 10000 ms Defines the time the instrument will wait at each well after a plate movement before it starts to measure Blanking time 0 100 of integration time Defin
91. term most generally used to refer in some way to a location within the computer memory the word ocation is actually used as a synonym 2 In communications see addressing addressing The method used to identify the location of a participant in a network Addressing specifies where the participant is located rather than who they are or how to get there amb temp ambient temperature 4 128 Ascent Software User s Guide application A role or task for which a computer system can be used or more usually the software used for such a purpose area filling Painting a defined area with a specific color or pattern arrow keys or direction keys cursor keys Four keys on a computer keyboard with arrows engraved on the keycaps pointing up down left and right They can be separate keys usually found to the right of the typewriter keys or combined with other keys The action performed by arrow keys is under program control but usually involves moving the cursor or some part of the display in the indicated direction ASCII or Ascii Acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard character encoding scheme introduced in 1963 and used widely on many machines attributes Information about a file that indicates whether the file is read only hidden or system and whether it has been changed since it was backed up background application An applicatio
92. the closing point The column label in the first column in each series identifies the series in the legend Additionally any formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart Any formatting applied to the remaining columns that make up the series is ignored 4 3 3 14 Gantt charts Use gantt charts to display a range of bars that indicate the relative time required for various activities within a project The horizontal axis Y shows the dates and the vertical axis X shows the categories This chart type requires two columns of data for each series The first column holds the starting date and the second column holds the duration Ascent Software User s Guide 4 77 4 3 4 Selecting chart elements You can click the left mouse button once on a chart element in order to select it The following table provides information on how to select each chart element To select Chart Chart title Footnote Legend Series Series label Plot 4 78 Click On the chart but not on a specific chart element Anywhere in the title area Anywhere in the footnote area In the legend but not the legend keys On an element in an unselected series or on the legend key identifying the series Anywhere on the series label In the plot but not on a specific chart element Effect Selection handles appear around the chart Selection handles appear around the title Yo
93. the half of the maximum rate and returns the corresponding time as a positive number If no decreasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Window 2 1000 The number of consecutive readings to use for evaluation e Time to change The time to change is used for calculating the time required to reach a defined change in the signal in each well The time is given in seconds from the first reading to the endpoint of the sliding window in seconds 3 60 Undefined Searches for the defined change in signal regardless of the rate polarity positive or negative and returns the corresponding time as a positive number Increasing Searches for the increasing defined change in signal and returns the corresponding time as a positive number If no increasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Decreasing Searches for the decreasing defined change in signal and returns the corresponding time as a positive number If no decreasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Base line 1 1000 The Base line parameter is the number of initial readings used for the base line calculation The base line can also be zero which means that the comparison will Ascent Software User s Guide be made against zero In Base line the program chooses as many measurement points as exist in the base line and calculates the mean thereof The mean equals the base line value Change Relative or Absolute The relative change from the
94. the left or right or deletes a selected text Copies a selected text to the Clipboard Moves a selected text to the Clipboard Pastes a text from the Clipboard Undoes the last editing action Ascent Software User s Guide 4 1 3 Worksheet keys The tables in this section list the keyboard commands you can use when working in a worksheet at run time The following table lists the action keys that allow you to enter data move the active cell within a selected range and recalculate the worksheet Key ENTER SHIFT ENTER TAB SHIFT TAB F2 F9 DEL Escape Description When in the edit mode it accepts the current entry When a range is selected it accepts the current entry and moves the active cell vertically to the next cell in the selection When in the edit mode it accepts the current entry When a range is selected it accepts the current entry and moves the active cell vertically to the previous cell in the selection When in the edit mode it accepts the current entry When a range is selected it accepts the current entry and moves the active cell horizontally to the next cell in the selection When in the edit mode it accepts the current entry When a range is selected it accepts the current entry and moves the active cell horizontally to the previous cell in the selection Enters the edit mode While in the editing mode F2 displays the Cell Text dialog box in which you can key in data and wrap it
95. the reference specified by the range number CHOOSE HLOOKUP LOOKUP MATCH and VLOOKUP functions Ascent Software User s Guide 4 29 4 2 2 39 INDIRECT Description Returns the contents of the cell referenced by the specified cell Syntax INDIRECT ref text 7 The ref text is a reference to a cell that references a third cell If the ref text is not a valid reference the Z REF is returned The a7 is the reference format This argument must be TRUE to represent an A1 reference format Formula One does not support the R1C1 reference format See Also OFFSET function Examples INDIRECT C1 returns the contents of the cell that C1 references If C1 contains D1 the contents of D1 is returned by INDIRECT 4 2 2 40 INT Description Rounds the supplied number down to the nearest integer Syntax INT number The number is any real number See Also CEILING FLOOR MOD ROUND and TRUNC functions Examples INT 10 99 returns 10 INT 10 99 returns 11 4 30 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 41 ISBLANK Description Determines if the specified cell is blank Syntax ISBLANK reference The reference is a reference to any cell Remarks If the referenced cell is blank True is returned False is returned if the cell is not blank See Also ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions Examples ISBLANK A1 returns True if A1 is a blank cell 4 2 2 42 ISERR Descr
96. the session has more than one kinetic step the steps to monitor can be selected from a list box The minimum and maximum Y range values of the curves can be set manually Another possibility is to let the program automatically set the maximum Note If you select Options Automatic runtime Curves the curves will be displayed automatically Note Ifyou have a kinetic measurement of a multipoint well then the running or online curve displayed is the kinetic curve of the middle point The curves can be printed using the Print button The curves can also be copied to the Clipboard using the Copy button Ascent Software User s Guide 1 45 Note You must print or copy the curves to the Clipboard if you want to save them manually They will disappear when the measurement step is completed and the Well Curves window is closed Note that what is seen on the screen is saved to the Clipboard so adjust the picture accordingly It is also possible to save the runtime curves automatically If the Create Kinetic Curves sheet in the Measure step is chosen the curves will automatically be copied and pasted into a new sheet on the Results Desktop 1 8 2 Executing loops of steps The execution order of the Steplist can be modified Steps may be executed in several loops General Step Settings Execute by Certain steps are identified as end loop steps These steps are e Steps with Overwrite general step settings checked An
97. the session will correct this automatically Check that the source data is numbers Actions Ensure that the filename and path are correct Some unused files should be deleted or the Recycle Bin should be emptied Ensure that the filename and path are correct Try to read the floppy disk from another computer Try to write on another floppy disk 4 99 4 6 5 User input output Message e _ Input not in the valid list e Invalid characters in the input password length must be 5 to 10 characters e Passwords not identical e The value should be in the range NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER e The value should be in the range NUMBER to NUMBER 4 6 6 Steplist Message e Wrong temperature in step STEPNAME The heater unit is not connected e Duplicate step name STEPNAME e Executable steps not found 4 100 Reason The user input is not recognized by the program The user input is not recognized by the program The password has less than 5 or more than 10 characters The passwords were not typed identically The user input is not recognized by the program The user input is not recognized by the program Reason The reader does not have the heater installed There are two steps that have identical names There is only a General step within the Steplist Actions Try to rewrite the input correctly Usually the cursor is flashi
98. to calculate the cut off Controls and calibrators defined in the plate layout can be used in the limit formulas The name must be written exactly as in the layout In case of replicates the mean of the replicates is used in the calculations Note lt is important to update formulas if the controls used in the respective formulas are removed deleted or all replicates disabled to obtain the correct limit values Interpretation e Categories Add text strings that will be displayed for the Curve Fit result categories in the Comment1 column in the concentration list in the Curve Fit sheet 3 74 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 9 4 View The user can select the items shown on the screen and printout with the View tab The report consists of everything that has been carried out The Curve Fit sheet can be used as a report sheet and through the View tab different layout options can be selected Curve fit sheet properties e Plate layout matrix Adds a layout map with defined names e Source data matrix Adds a source data matrix to the Curve Fit sheet e Concentration matrix Calculated concentrations in plate format e g 8 x 12 grid Ascent Software User s Guide 3 75 Concentration list A list of measurements including the well name raw data calculated concentration dilution factor calculated concentration with the dilution accounted for average of the raw data SD CV and the two comment columns Comm
99. type are e Interval hh mm ss s The time between the successive readings e Meas count 1 1000 The number of consecutive measurements e Create Kinetic Curve sheet Automatically copies kinetic curves and pastes them on a new sheet named Measure Curves on the Results Desktop 2 1 5 6 4 Dual kinetic The Dual kinetic measurement type is a combination of the Dual measurement type and the Kinetic measurement type Two readings are taken several times from each measurement point using the defined interval time and the two selected filters filter pairs The parameters for the Dual Kinetic measurement type are the same as for those in the Kinetic measurement type except that two filters filter pairs are used instead of one filter filter pair For more information about parameters see the Kinetic Dual and Single on p 2 38 measurement types 2 1 5 6 5 Scanning Scans over the given area The Scanning measurement type is similar to Single except that the points are read while the plate is moving This mode is useful for large wells with a lot of measurement points Use low acceleration if the well contains a liquid of low viscosity The parameters for the Area scanning measurement type are the same as for the measurement type Single Note In Scanning mode the maximum Integration time is 860 ms FL only 2 42 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 6 6 Monitor The Monitor measurement type is a special measurement type
100. well after a plate movement before it starts to measure Blanking time 0 100 of integration time Fluoroskan Ascent FL only Defines the integration time used in automatic blanking of the instrument background The instrument performs automatic blanking before and after each execution group the Execute by 1 n wells setting As a default this blanking uses the same integration time as the actual measurement step so that 50 of the integration is performed before and 50 after the execution group With this setting the user can reduce the time spent for automatic blanking For example if the Execute by 1 n wells setting is one and the user has defined a 10 s integration time the instrument will perform a 5 s blanking before and after each well If one defines here a blanking time setting of 2096 the instrument will perform only a 1 s blanking before and after each well If the setting is zero then automatic instrument blanking is totally prevented The Dispenser speed settings options are With these settings you can adjust the speeds of the optional dispensers to gain optimal dispensing results The default setting 18 is suitable for a viscosity equal to that of water The dispenser speed setting defines the speed as of the maximum possible speed with that dispenser Dispenser 1 1 100 Defines the dispensing speed of dispenser number 1 Dispenser 2 1 100 Defines the dispensing speed of dispenser number 2 Disp
101. 0 22 2 1 Menus 8 8 2 1 ive ue tee 2 1 DOSSION kc EE 2 3 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 4 2 1 2 5 2 1 2 6 2 1 2 7 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 4 2 1 3 5 2 1 3 6 2 1 4 2 1 4 1 2 1 4 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 4 2 1 4 5 2 1 5 2 1 5 1 2 1 5 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 1 5 2 1 2 1 5 2 2 2 1 5 2 3 2 1 5 2 4 2 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 6 2 1 5 3 2 1 5 4 2 1 5 5 2 1 5 6 2 1 5 6 1 2 1 5 6 2 2 1 5 6 3 2 1 5 6 4 2 1 5 6 5 2 1 5 6 6 2 1 5 7 2 1 5 8 et eet tite dint extet ee 2 4 SAVE 2 6 Save 2 6 ile RI 2 8 Recently used file 1151 2 8 te oett 2 9 SURE na De vus 2 9 Desktop Bar aet deer 2 9 Status tee ertet du eda eed cd 2 10 Tool Ba i dde vicc da br eee 2 10 Tabs Pe e RN ETR RES 2 11 Procedure ver dE UR o ERR DURER 2 11 R sUlte eec etes ptor t e Ere Qr o ad d 2 11 CDs fuor us 2 12 Proced re i esceicreset e ciae urne e uet 2 12 iv eri e ned 2 12 Plate OUt iode Tate te edt ve p D e 2 12 Prime not CF iiic teta inae ER EXE dee 2 12 Empty not CE
102. 0 to 3 are connected to the instrument via the serial interface not CF 1 3 9 Filter Pair validation The validation process is executed in the following main steps e Select Filters from the Setup menu e Add the fluorometric filter pair by entering the filter positions and wavelengths Add Start or select an existing filter pair and then press Validate Validating please wait Ascent Software User s Guide 1 13 The instrument selects the filters and measures all the reference chips After the measurements the instrument selects a suitable reference chip value and attaches it to the filter pair to be validated The calculated correction coefficient is saved within the instrument the autocalibration procedure the instrument is validated against the selected reference chip and the correction coefficient is used to compensate for the degradation of the optical system if necessary Refer to the instrument manual for more information If a suitable reference chip is not found the program displays a message for the user to accept or to cancel using this filter pair Note Filter setup is required before using the instrument Ensure the filters in Setup Filters are exactly the same and exactly in the same positions as in the filter wheel 1 3 10 Password The program contains a password system which can be switched on or off in Setup Password The password is requested once the program is started
103. 35 7724 Corr coeff R2 1 0000 Effective Dose ED1 20 23 999992 ED2 50 14 999995 ED3 80 5 9999986 3 68 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 9 2 1 Modify fit and graph Modify fit and graph Oi xi File Fittype Transformation Marke Linear regression LLS v Linear regression SVD Quadratic polynomial Cubic polynomial Quantic polynomial Paint to point Cubic spline Log Logit Four parameter logistic Lj Sigmoid logistic Enab Disab Calc 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Concentrations Lin C Log Note some cases the warning message Not enough data can be seen in the Modify fit and graph dialog The user can however create the Curve Fit sheet by pressing the OK button File The Curve Fit gt Modify fit and graph window be closed here Fit type Select the type of curve fit algorithm Linear regression LLS Linear regression SVD Quadratic polynomial Cubic polynomial Quartic polynomial Point to point Cubic spline Log Logit Four parameter logistic Sigmoid logistic Ascent Software User s Guide 3 69 Polynomial fit Generally the polynomial fit function is determined as bx mx where n 7 2 3 or 4 Derived from the above equation e bx for Linear Regression SVD and the minimum number of calibrators is 2 e y a bx for Quadratic polynomial and the minimu
104. 38 The specific parameters in the Dual measurement type are e Meas interval hh mm ss s The time interval between the measurements 2 40 Ascent Software User s Guide The fluorometric parameters are e Excitation The wavelength of the first excitation filter e Emission The wavelength of the first emission filter e Excitation 2 The wavelength of the second excitation filter e Emission 2 The wavelength of the second emission filter The luminometric parameters are FL only e Filter 1 amp 2 The wavelengths for the first and second measurement filters For other parameters see section Single on p 2 38 2 1 5 6 3 Kinetic In the Kinetic measurement type several measurements are taken from the selected wells using the defined interval time The number of readings is defined in the Meas count field General Parameters b Step name Measurel Measurel Unit Step time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 I Measurement method Fluorometric 7 Measurement type Kinetic Integration time ms Lag time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Interval hh mm ss 00 00 00 0 PASS Meas count 1 1000 Create Kinetic Curves sheet Overwrite general step settings Beam Normal Small Ascent Software User s Guide 2 41 The general parameters for all the measurement types are described in the Single section The specific parameters for the Kinetic measurement
105. 39 3 2 7 7 Rename Sheet uiae e dd a oet 3 39 3 2 7 8 PropertieSe ee aset o ono ot 3 40 3 2 8 PROCESS e cenae arc Pe eda de 3 41 3 2 8 1 FUNCTION ci nud esee ce de edle oi e 3 41 3 2 8 2 Graphic RR ea ee ee eee 3 46 3 2 8 3 spur 3 47 3 2 8 3 1 fell EET 3 48 3 2 8 3 2 Source and calculation cccccceccssssseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeteaeeess 3 49 3 2 8 3 3 MI GW EMEN 3 50 3 2 8 4 at re end 3 51 3 2 8 4 1 3 51 3 2 8 4 2 Calculation 3 52 3 2 8 5 Blank 3 53 3 2 8 6 3 54 3 2 8 7 Kinetic menn 3 55 3 2 8 7 1 3 56 3 2 8 7 2 3 57 3 2 8 8 Ratio Inhibition 222 3 62 3 2 8 8 1 SSOUNG Gis vile 3 62 3 2 8 8 2 Ratio Inhibition 2 0 3 63 3 2 8 9 E vk Pa a ac 3 64 3 2 8 9 1 ric cctacadattacig decked ctdeacageteasavdsagticadunaandeascuneuatebiasascnassie 3 65 3 2 8 9 2 aux dv die uia Gus 3 66 3 2 8 9 2 1 Modify fit and 2000000 3 69
106. 4 1 1 11 AVERAGE iux 4 12 4 1 1 12 je dIB cuo 4 13 4 1 1 13 CHAR S Rui RENE Ee 4 14 4 1 1 14 CHOOSE eerie Eee 4 14 4 1 1 15 CLEAN ee Dee 4 15 4 1 1 16 CODE ce cet c os 4 16 4 1 1 17 COLUM N rne RI RI X DR 4 16 4 1 1 18 ite reed toten dettes 4 17 4 1 1 19 COS ibam entes eui ies 4 17 4 1 1 20 COSE iicet tutt ere 4 17 4 1 1 21 COUNT IRE UE a ae 4 18 4 1 1 22 RoN ug 4 18 4 1 1 23 iei DA 4 19 4 1 1 24 DA TEVALUE oa ead et esa 4 20 4 1 1 25 DAY cui das E UE 4 20 4 1 1 26 ERRORZLYPE nite edt tee ted eet eed cae 4 21 4 1 1 27 Add 4 22 4 1 1 28 ERE 4 22 4 1 1 29 EXP iEn enn ree re eh od 4 23 4 1 1 30 AG Mates CE 4 23 4 1 1 31 FALSE texte 4 24 4 1 1 32 FIN Dm 4 24 4 1 1 33 RE 4 25 Ascent Software User s Guide ix 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 1 43 1 44 1 45 1 46 1 47 1 48 1 49 1 50 1 51 1 52 1 53 1 54 1 55 1 56 1 57 1 58 1 59 1 60 1 61 1 62 1 63 1 64 1 65 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 69 1 70 1 71 1 72 1 73 1 74 HLOOKUP
107. 4 104 Reason The acceleration ramp starts or the deceleration ramp ends outside the Y position limits The RAM memory failed the startup test The number of columns or rows to measure is not within the allowed limits During startup the A D converter is tested by connecting the input to signal ground This should produce a near zero signal with little noise If the noise is too high this error is reported During startup the two gain steps of the A D converter are fitted together by applying a correction factor for the x10 gain If this factor is not within the limits this error is reported The checksum byte of the EEPROM is incorrect Parameters are lost Actions This error should never appear if the instrument is used in the standalone mode or through the Ascent PC software Contact service if the error persists This error should never appear if the instrument is used in the standalone mode or through the Ascent PC software Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e high stepper offset e Temperature error e Toohigh A D converter ground offset e failure e Invalid serial number Reason When adjusting the stepper offsets either manually or automatically one or more of the resulting offsets would be outside the limits That
108. 4 3 8 amp 4 84 4 4 Remote Control Interface 4 85 4 5 Computer control 0 222 4 94 4 5 1 Remote commands of the Ascent Instrument 4 94 4 5 2 T 4 94 4 5 3 Command format eese eene 4 94 4 5 4 Response aai 4 95 4 5 5 4 95 4 6 Warning and error 4 96 4 6 1 Serial 1 nennen 4 96 4 6 2 Printo iiu de te E bc vete y den fedus 4 97 4 6 3 Nlg jg 4 97 4 6 4 File 4 4 04 0 0 4 99 4 6 5 User 1 4 100 4 6 6 StepliSt ee eee 4 100 4 6 7 4 101 4 6 8 Reader type 4 102 4 6 9 Multiskan Ascent related 4 02022 4 102 4 6 10 Fluoroskan Ascent including FL amp CF Luminoskan Ascent and Nepheloskan Ascent related 4 107 4 6 11 IEMS Reader MF 4 115 4 7 File types used in Ascent Software esseere 4 122 4 7 1 Work
109. 8 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 46 2 62 2 64 Format Alignnent iicet eder e a e d da d fecus 3 5 3 6 3 31 T EET TEUER LT TUER 3 5 3 6 3 27 Cell Refere ES trece va end eee tret ae 3 5 3 6 3 33 Ascent Software User s Guide xvii FOR E aio nnd utem ud 3 5 3 6 3 28 4 83 Number1 35 2 27 2 29 2 31 3 5 3 6 3 30 3 44 3 73 3 79 3 82 3 83 3 84 4 21 4 66 4 89 Four parameter logistic ccccccccceccececeeecececeeeeeceeceseseenenenenss 3 69 3 71 4 97 G GloSSarya cie ette hee dre oderint 4 128 1 28 2 36 2 71 3 22 4 79 4 83 4 84 1 17 2 2 2 79 3 6 3 84 4 98 4 133 4 144 HIS EIMS SyStetTis ce cene eae A 4 85 IEMS Reader MF cdd 4 115 INCUD ATION tlie escis 1 46 2 47 2 48 Installation of Ascent 1 6 1 7 Instrument 1 13 SOUU PD 1 12 Integration time 1 27 2 35 2 38 2 39 2 42 3 2 4 107 4 109 4 114 Interval 2 37 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 44 2 46 2 50 2 51 3 66 3 71 4 107 shaking uiae 2 50 K Keep dispenser syringe
110. 9 100 Fax 358 9 3291 415 www thermolabsystems fi A Thermo Electron Business 4 156 Ascent Software User s Guide
111. Files of Type Lets you select the file types you want displayed With regard to sessions the fixed file extension is always sef for the Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF and sec for the Fluoroskan Ascent FL The Fluoroskan Ascent FL can also read sef and sel Luminoskan Ascent luminometric file files in addition to sec files Directories Select the directory in which the program stores the Session you want to open Drives Select the drive in which the program stores the Session you want to open Network Displays a dialog box with available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network 2 1 2 3 Save Save Session menu or al Use this command to save the current Session and its name and location With regard to sessions the file extension is always sef for the Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF and sec for the Fluoroskan Ascent FL If you want to change the name or location of an existing Session before you save it choose the Save As command 2 1 2 4 Save As Save As Session menu Use this command to save the current Session with a new name Note To save a Session with its existing name and location use the 2 6 Save command Ascent Software User s Guide Save Session As File Name Directories C ASCENTADEFAULTF SE c ascent Calciumd sef E Cellprod sef E gt ASCENT Cellprol sef Eyf
112. On 2 D line charts the values are plotted along the vertical Y axis and the categories are displayed on the horizontal X axis On 3 D charts the values are plotted on the vertical Y axis the categories are grouped along the horizontal X axis and the depth Z axis shows the series 4 3 3 6 Step charts Use step charts to compare items that do not show trends Step charts display distinct points along the value Y axis with vertical lines showing the difference between each point The horizontal X axis shows the categories 4 3 3 7 Combination charts Use combination charts to visually highlight the differences between multiple series of data A different method can be used to draw each data series 4 3 3 8 Pie and doughnut charts Use pie or doughnut charts to show the relationship of parts to the whole Each pie or doughnut represents a category Each slice of the pie or doughnut represents a value in that category You can separate or explode slices on a chart by clicking a slice and dragging it away from the rest of the pie or doughnut 4 3 3 9 Radar charts Use radar charts to show changes or frequencies of each series relative to a center point and to one another Lines connect all the data markers in the same series You can choose to fill the lines thereby creating a radar area chart Ascent Software User s Guide 4 75 4 3 3 10 XY charts Use XY charts to plot two groups of numbers as one series of XY coo
113. PLE SAMPLE SAMPLE sta2 Sample3 Samplei 19 Sample27 Sample25 Sample43 Sample5i Sample59 Sample67 Samplez5 Sampie amp 3 0000 fha 1 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 1 1 1 1 CALIBR SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE p sus Sample4 Samplei2 Sample20 Sample28 Sample36 Sample44 Sample52 Sample60 Sample68 Sample76 Sample amp 4 0 000 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CALIBR 1 SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE 594 Sample5 Samplei3 Sample21 Sample29 Sample3 Sample45 1 Sample69 85 E 5 000 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ad 1 1 Ad 1 1 Ad Ad Ad CALIBR SAMPLE SAMPLE seMPLE seMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE F 845 Sample6 Sample14 Sample22 Sample30 Sample38 Sample46 Sample54 Sample62 Sample70 Sample 8 Sample86 F 130 000 1 1 11 11 1 11 11 11 11 11 ICALIBR 5eMPLE SeMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE G sta8 Sample 15 Sample23 Sample21 Sample55 Sample63 Sample 9 Sample amp G 00 000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 CONTROL SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE seMPLE seMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE Pos Sample8 Sample16 Sample24 Sa
114. S Excel 4 0 can be used to transfer data between Ascent Software and Microsoft Excel The filename extension is XLS The tabbed text is an ASCII format where the rows are represented by a line of text Ascent Software User s Guide 2 55 ending with LF The columns in each row are separated by a TAB character and the extension is TXT Most spreadsheet programs can import this kind of file and the file can also be edited with text editors like MS Notepad or word processors such as MS Word Remember to keep the file extension as txt 2 1 5 13 Print m Print Steps menu or Use this command to add a Print step to the Steplist The parameters of the Print step are e Step name The name of the step Different Print steps do not require unique step names 2 56 Ascent Software User s Guide e Select sheet s to print The sheets to print can be selected from the list e Select all With the Select all button all the sheets are selected to be printed The Print step is executed after all the other steps The sheets are printed using the system printer See Section Before Installation in the Overview part of the manual Note Sheets are printed according to the current print area It is recommended to check and or modify the print area Results Desktop Print Set Print Area before running the session 2 1 5 14 Remove Remove Steps menu Use the Remove command to remove a step from the Steplist or simply
115. SSIOTD estie potio Nd 3 7 a vn OS e EE 3 7 3 7 3 7 REMPLI 3 7 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 2 5 Priob eiie edi 3 7 3 2 2 6 Last five 6 22 2 3 8 3 2 2 7 EXIU seinen dedo E Denis dE 3 8 3 2 3 deer ES 3 8 3 2 3 1 Pup 3 8 3 2 3 2 caress wetted ILL M EIE eus 3 8 3 2 3 3 Paste dated evi oido 3 9 3 2 3 4 Paste ont neon t oe reae dre 3 9 3 2 3 5 tr diee EE e Fett ESQ Ye e NC NGA EXTA 3 9 3 2 3 6 In Sette evt ah tte te uh t ete Rs 3 10 3 2 3 7 REMOVE eo 3 10 3 2 3 8 Gell NAMES ie a e a 3 11 3 2 3 9 Find and Replace 3 12 3 2 3 10 Go TO Gell irt rci ert e Pp Dr dre SU a see 3 13 3 2 3 11 Enable Disable 5 1 5 eee t dd Yee ea 3 13 3 2 4 E 3 14 3 2 4 1 D sktop B8rz oU pee E 3 14 3 2 4 2 Status BaP aie bte teet a Pe on dened 3 14 3 2 4 3 BE 3 15 3 2 4 4 TADS Bari es cete car etra pe eee a 3 16 3 2 4 5 Hide Show 3 16 3 2 4 6 Arrange Sheets 3 17 3 2 4 7 Zoom n i e vended 3 18 3 2 4 8 ZOOM
116. The most used tool bar buttons are Click Action al Opens a new Session Opens an existing Session The program displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the Session you want name If you have not named the Session the program displays the Save As dialog box The default exists Selects the Measure step to the Steplist i Saves the active Session with its current Continued 4 124 Ascent Software User s Guide Action Selects the Dispense step to the Steplist does not apply to Multiskan Selects the Dispense And Measure step to the Steplist does not apply to Multiskan Selects the Incubate step to the Steplist Selects the Shake step to the Steplist Selects the Pause step to the Steplist Selects the Save Load sheet step to the Steplist Selects the Print step to the Steplist Defines the tool to Add wells to the measurement area Defines the tool to Remove wells from the measurement area Defines the middle point of the well to be measured does not apply to Multiskan Nepheloskan or iEMS QEBBERBE amp E Defines all the points in the well to be measured does not apply to Multiskan Nepheloskan or iEMS Defines the horizontal diagonal of the well to be measured does not apply to Multiskan Nepheloskan or iEMS Continued Ascent Software User s Guide 4 125 4 126 Click e X Bo E Action
117. Thermo Labsystems 7 Ascent 56 7 Thermo Labsystems for Fluoroskan Ascent Fluoroskan Ascent FL amp Fluoroskan Ascent CF Copyright Copyright 1997 2002 Thermo Labsystems All rights reserved Reproduction of Ascent Software or the accompanying user documentation in whole or in part is prohibited Trademarks Labsystems logo Fluoroskan and Fluoroskan Ascent are registered trademarks of Thermo Labsystems Ascent Software is a trademark of Thermo Labsystems Microsoft Windows Windows NT and MS DOS are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation All other trademarks registered trademarks and copyrights are property of their respective holders Disclaimer Thermo Labsystems reserves the right to change its products and services at any time to incorporate technological developments This manual is subject to change without notice Although this manual has been prepared with every precaution to ensure accuracy Thermo Labsystems assumes no liability for any errors or omissions nor for any damages resulting from the application or use of this information No liability for consequential damages Thermo Labsystems shall not be liable for any damages whatsoever arising out of the use or inability to use this product ii Ascent Software
118. UE 2 53 Ascent Software User s Guide xxi Serial POrt ses eee ee 1 4 2 53 2 77 4 94 4 96 4 148 5 PE 2 53 Series1 35 2 24 2 26 2 27 2 29 2 30 2 31 3 46 3 58 4 49 4 72 4 73 4 74 4 75 4 76 4 77 4 78 4 79 4 80 4 81 4 82 4 84 Elem 4 78 4 81 4 82 4 84 Session autOoSadV6ssin d tede aree codi Deci aa 2 78 EX Ut ATE 1 7 2 2 2 9 3 6 3 8 New1 42 1 49 1 50 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 55 2 67 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 34 3 40 Open1 7 1 15 1 33 1 47 1 48 2 2 2 4 2 5 2 11 2 25 2 26 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 35 4 124 Print1 17 1 22 1 30 1 41 1 45 2 2 2 8 2 11 2 30 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 71 2 73 2 79 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 19 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 85 4 82 4 97 4 125 Save1 22 1 30 1 33 1 46 1 48 2 2 2 6 2 11 2 25 2 54 2 55 2 73 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 36 3 37 4 82 4 88 4 91 4 101 4 124 4 125 4 146 Save 1 33 2 2 2 6 2 25 3 6 3 7 4 82 4 88 4 124 4 146 Settings 1 6 1 12 1 13 1 20 1 21 1 26 1 27 1 29 1 46 2 14 2 32 2 33 2 35 2 39 2 45 2 47 2 50 2 53 2 66 2 67 3 83 4 80 4 97 Setup COONS Er 1 12 1 18 2 2 2 24 2 68 3 64 3 77 DiS penser S AL 1 12 1 13 2 2 2 66 2 73 eoe E E 1 12 1 13 1 14 2 2 2 62 Instrument Statusi ruine a 1 3 1 13 2 2 2 40 2 73 Number1 35 2 27 2 29 2 31 3 5 3 6 3 30 3 44 3 73 3 79 3 82 3 83 3 84 4 21 4 66
119. User s Guide 3 77 3 2 8 10 1 Source Cut Off sheet properties Mesue Amy 007 Displays the available data sheets from which the source sheet can be selected Control source Specifies the source sheet and the assay name for the control source e Sheet name Specifies the name of the source sheet for the controls e Assay name Specifies the assay name for the control source 3 78 Ascent Software User s Guide Sample source Specifies the source sheet and the assay name for the sample source e Sheet name Specifies the name of the source sheet for the sample source e Assay name Specifies the assay name for the sample source 3 2 8 10 2 Classification Cut Off sheet properties le so v 0 9 Neg 0 05 e Number of limits This tells the number of limits used Ascent Software User s Guide 3 79 e Limit values or formulas Contains defined limit values or formulas to calculate the cut off Controls and calibrators defined in the plate layout can be used in the limit formulas The name must be written exactly as in the layout In case of replicates the mean of the replicates is used in the calculations Note lt is important to update formulas if the controls used in the respective formulas are removed deleted or all replicates disabled to obtain the correct limit values Interpretation e Categories Add text strings that will be displayed for the Cut Off result categories
120. Ve Load s ceras tercie tis venit ers te e pu d 2 b4 PrN ET 2 b6 REMOVE secs beri etes eae Rue qux Fu EN EC TR dA 2 57 inactivate sona ect cet veste retta de cre ia 2 57 ActiVate o exar ea er 2 58 Print Current Step 2 58 Print All Steps uet nel eats 2 58 Setup evades ein aati ieee ein as 2 59 Plate Templates 2 59 FITS rs deer preter re a ROREM EN EN FR e 2 62 PassWord iicet eerte 2 65 Dispensers 2 66 Default settitigs 1i ng diesen 2 66 AD 2 68 PEIEEOUL rr cot ee opo Dor tren 2 69 Instrument 0 nennen 2 73 OptlOris zi eroe iret net eR 2 77 Help eod dee cm te e E 2 79 Results Desktop onde 3 1 General results e e n a a 3 1 Standard 5 3 1 Measurements inner ea ea dh ad AR ER ea 3 1 CURVES EE 3 3 Clem ME ccc 3 3 R hotatisz eerie e eer over eet reser a Eo E 3 3 Basic 3 3 Sheet names n qr 3 3 Sheet types and properties 3 3 Linking sheets edente ate ertet 3 4 Enable Disable 3 4 Menus res lts i vas 3 5 Gernieral iacc ob icr nana ade ER 3 5 O8
121. _position is greater than the number of characters in the text an empty string is returned If the start_position is less than 1 the VALUE is returned The num_chars is the number of characters to return If the num_chars is negative the VALUE is returned Remarks If the start_position plus the number of characters in the num_chars exceed the length of the text the characters from the start_position to the end of the text are returned See Also CODE FIND LEFT RIGHT and SEARCH functions Examples MID Labsystems COMBIPLATE 12 10 returns COMBIPLATE MID Dispenser 2 speed 1 100 11 1 returns 2 4 2 2 60 MIN Description Returns the smallest value on the specified list of numbers Syntax MIN number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers logical values text representations of numbers reference to a range containing those values 4 42 Ascent Software User s Guide See Also Examples Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors If a range reference is included in the list text logical expressions and empty cells in the range are ignored If there are no numbers on the list O is returned AVERAGE and MAX functions MIN 50 100 150 500 200 returns 50 MIN A1 F12 returns the smallest value in the range 4 2 2 61 MINUTE Description Syntax Rem
122. an open the Fill dialog Using the Fill dialog you can automatically specify as many wells as you want to and the well name is automatically numbered to give each well unique names Clear all Clears the whole plate layout Cut Cuts the selected well specifications into the clipboard e Copy Copies the selected well specifications into the clipboard e Paste Pastes the well specifications from the clipboard You can open files with pla and lay extensions and save files with the pla extension Ascent Software User s Guide 1 33 1 5 7 1 Fill dialog 40 of aiatorns upeat eA ddl Dide The data fields are e You can select the type of item from the drop down list This can be either CALIBR CONTROL SAMPLE or BLANK Name You can edit the name of the item and by using max 50 characters in the beginning the software will automatically number the wells uniquely Load ID s Loads a list of sample IDs from a text file and uses these as sample names Only with SAMPLE type The samples must be separated by a line feed in the text file i e each sample on it s own line e Concentration Dilution 1 You can enter the concentration of the calibrator or the dilution of the sample e Assay You can specify another assay by editing the field or selecting the assay from the drop down list 1 34 Ascent Software User s Guide Filling order You can select the filling order of the
123. and to exit the program 3 2 3 Edit 3 2 3 1 Cut Cut Edit menu or Ed Removes the selection from the sheet and places it on the Clipboard The selection can be a cell or a cell range When you cut characters in a cell the characters are removed to the Clipboard The cut characters are then available for pasting into a new location Shortcut Ctrl X 3 2 3 2 Copy Copy Edit menu or Copies the selection to the Clipboard The selection can be a cell or a cell range When you copy characters in a cell the characters are placed on the Clipboard The copied characters are then available for pasting into a new location Shortcut Ctrl C 3 8 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 3 3 Paste Paste Edit menu or Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the selected location Shortcut Ctrl V 3 2 3 4 Paste Values Paste Values Edit menu Pastes values only from the Clipboard into the selected location Shortcut none 3 2 3 5 Clear Clear Edit menu Clear Cancel C Formats C Values Clears the selected area All Formats or Values Formats clears the calculation formula Values clears the numerical values and All clears both the calculation formula and the numerical values Shortcut Del Ascent Software User s Guide 3 9 3 2 3 6 Insert Insert Edit menu Inserts a row or range of blank cells equivalent in size and shape into the selected cell range The selected r
124. anged using the Sheet Rename selection 3 1 2 2 Sheet types and properties There are several types of sheets that have different kinds of functions The standard sheet types are general measurement multipoint blank subtraction precalculation organize kinetic processors ratio inhibition Ascent Software User s Guide 3 3 curve fit and cut off The general sheets are created by the user Sheet New Other sheet types are described in the Process menu section Every sheet except Steps RunStatus Curves and general has properties which can be changed in the Properties dialog Each sheet type has its own type of properties Note Many sheet properties utilize the area definition and plate layout To properly update the existing results sheets the area definition and the plate layout should match If there is a mismatch you might get extra results 3 1 2 3 Linking sheets Sheets are linked together automatically in different ways depending on the sessions New sheets are progressively generated and linked for example in the following manner Measure1 sheet gt Blank Subtraction sheet gt gt Curve Fit sheet As Source Sheet 1 If blank wells are used andthe Finally Measure sheet acts as the produced using source sheet the Blank Subtraction sheet as the source sheet 3 1 2 4 Enable Disable values In case of erroneous measurements values can be disabled With regard to replicates as well as blanks
125. arks See Also Examples Returns the minute that corresponds to the supplied date number The seria _number is the time expressed as serial number The decimal portion of the number represents the time as a fraction of the day The result is an integer ranging from 0 to 59 DAY HOUR MONTH NOW SECOND WEEKDAY and YEAR functions MINUTE 34506 4 returns 36 MINUTE 34399 825 returns 48 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 43 4 2 2 62 MOD Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the remainder after dividing a number with a specified divisor MOD number divisor The number is any number The divisor is any non zero number If the divisor is 0 the DIV 0 is returned INT ROUND and TRUNC functions MOD 23 3 returns 1 MOD 23 3 returns 2 4 2 2 63 MONTH Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples 4 44 Returns the month that corresponds to the supplied date MONTH seria _number The serial number is the date expressed as serial number or as text e g 06 21 94 or 21 Jun 94 The MONTH returns a number ranging from 1 January to 12 December DAY HOUR MINUTE NOW SECOND TODAY WEEKDAY and YEAR functions MONTH 06 21 94 returns 6 MONTH 34626 returns 10 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 64 N Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples 4 2 2 65 NA Description Syntax Rem
126. arks See Also Tests the supplied value and returns the value if it is a number N va ue The va ue is a value or a reference to a cell containing a value to test Numbers are returned as numbers serial numbers formatted as dates are returned as serial numbers and the logical function TRUE is returned as 1 All other expressions return 0 T and VALUE functions N 32467 returns 32467 N A4 returns 1 if A4 contains the logical function True Returns the error value ZN A which represents not available Use the to mark cells that lack data without leaving them empty Empty cells may not be correctly represented certain calculations Although the NA does not use any arguments you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function ISNA function Ascent Software User s Guide 4 45 4 2 2 66 NOT Description Returns a logical value that is the opposite of its value Syntax NOT ogica The ogical is an expression that returns a logical value e g True or False Remarks If the logical is false the NOT returns True Conversely if the logical is true the NOT returns False See Also AND IF and OR functions Examples NOT TRUE returns False NOT MONTH 12 25 94 12 returns False 4 2 2 67 NOW Description Returns the current date and time as a serial number Syntax NOW Remarks In a serial number the numbers to the left of the decimal p
127. aves the worksheet in the current directory unless you type a full path for the worksheet or select a different directory from the directory listing Type a name for the worksheet or accept the proposed name Note NOT use any names more than 8 characters long Ascent Software does not support long names Directories Lists the current directory and any subdirectories Double click the directories and subdirectories to move through the list Ascent Software User s Guide 3 37 e List Files of Type Lists the available file formats that allow you to save a worksheet for use in another application The formats available vary according to the active worksheet e Drives Lists the available drives Select the drive to which you want to save the worksheet e Network Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network 3 2 7 5 Advanced Copy Advanced Copy Sheet menu Use this command to make an almost exact copy of a sheet Note The Advanced Copy is however not locked as opposed to the Measure sheet where the values in the sheet cannot be tampered with All values colors and cell names are copied to the new sheet The currently active sheet is always the source sheet of the Advanced Copy command and the name of the target sheet is requested in the dialog Note The Advanced Copy sheet can be made active by linking the sour
128. axis and categories are plotted on the horizontal X axis You can also chart one or more series against the secondary Y axis instead of against the primary axis 4 3 3 2 Bar charts Use bar charts to compare one item to another or to compare a number of items over a period of time These charts are particularly effective at showing large changes from one category to another Each 2 D or 3 D bar represents a value in the data grid Bars representing a series are located at the same position in each category and have the same color and pattern In 2 D charts values are grouped on the vertical Y axis and bars are grouped by category along the horizontal X axis On 3 D charts the values are plotted on the vertical Y axis the categories are grouped along the horizontal X axis and the depth Z axis shows the series 4 3 3 3 Horizontal bar charts Horizontal bars are similar to standard bar charts except that the categories are organized on a vertical X axis and the values are plotted on a horizontal Y axis 4 3 3 4 Clustered bar charts Series and data points on a clustered bar chart are displayed as they are on a 2 D bar chart however the chart and all the chart elements are displayed on a 3 D chart 4 74 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 3 3 5 Line charts Use line charts to show trends or changes in data over a period of time These charts emphasize the time flow and rate of change rather than the amount of change
129. bar may tell the user what line and page is currently in use if typeover or insert mode is in force and which font is currently selected while a database status bar might have the current record number and field name and whether the display may be edited strikeout Strikeout is a method of leaving a deleted section of printed or displayed text visible but clearly marked with a horizontal line through it Ascent Software User s Guide 4 149 string 1 A flexible one dimensional array i e a flexible vector of symbols where the lower bound of the vector is fixed at unity but the upper bound i e the string length may vary 2 A type of input to a graphics system consisting of a sequence of characters The usual input device is a keyboard submenu A menu that appears as a result of the selection of a menu item Menu items that cause further menus to appear rather than cause an immediate action to be performed are often indicated by ellipsis by a right pointing arrow or some other device as in SAVE or SEARCH Syntax syntax rules The rules defining the legal sequences of symbolic elements in a language The syntax rules define the form of the various constructs in the language but say nothing about the meaning of these constructs Examples of constructs are expressions procedures and programs in the case of programming languages and terms well formed formulas and sentences in the case of log
130. base line in percent or then the absolute change The change in signal is specified in the Change parameter and is compared to the base line The Window parameter here means the number of consecutive measurements which should reach the change before the result is accepted e Maximum of well Peak The maximum of well is used to search the maximum value of the well e Maximum Minimum Change The minimum measured value of the well is subtracted from the maximum measured value of the well e Time to maximum Peak The time to maximum is used to calculate the time elapsed before the peak is reached The time is given in seconds e Time to maximum Peak 2 The time to maximum 2 equals the time to reach half of the maximum value e Select Reading Select reading is used to select the measurement Reading Index 1 1000 The index of the kinetic measurement Enables the user to select the kinetic measurement that is wanted in further calculations e Integral Estimates the area under the curve The starting point can be moved Ignore first n readings Ignore last n readings Ignores a defined number of readings Starts from the last reading Ascent Software User s Guide 3 61 3 2 8 8 Ratio Inhibition Ratio Inhibition Process menu 3 2 8 8 1 Source Ratio Inhibition sheet properties e Source sheet name Select the sheet that contains the measurement data e Assay name Specifies the assay that
131. blank The Number of samples controls field can be edited when the type is SAMPLE or CONTROL The Generate concentration dilution series check box can be selected when the type is CALIBR or SAMPLE The fields belonging to series can be edited when the Generate concentration dilution series check box is selected In other words the No of calibrators dilutions Operators and By fields are active when Generate concentration dilution series is checked The Navigate arrows are constantly active The Apply and Close buttons are active on every occasion and the Clear all button is inactive only when the plate is empty Apply is inactive when all wells have been specified The Clear button is active when the selected well contains data Ascent Software User s Guide 2 31 2 1 5 4 Settings Parameters Area definition Layout Settings Instrument settings Dispenser speed settings Moving type umy Dispenser 1 1 100 Execute by 1 96 wells Dispenser 2 1 100 Dispense all and measure Plate acceleration o Settle delay 0 10000ms Blanking time 0 100 The instrument settings are e Moving type The program searches for wells to dispense measure in the order defined by this input field If the Moving type has been selected as above the columns may not actually be measured in opposite directions unless adjacent columns are selected If a well has several measure
132. ce data to the Advanced Copy The Advanced Copy sheet is not updated automatically when changes regarding plate layout area definition etc are carried out Sheet Advanced Copy Enter new sheet name Copy fCurvefitl 3 38 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 7 6 Delete Sheet Delete Sheet Sheet menu or Use this command to delete the current worksheet 3 Delete Are you sure you want to delete Warning If you press the YES button you cannot undo this command 3 2 7 7 Rename Sheet Rename Sheet Sheet menu Use this command to rename the active sheet Note Automatically generated sheets Measure1 Steps RunStatus Measure1 Curves cannot be renamed The renaming of a sheet can cause the references to be lost Enter a new sheet name Note The reference to the sheet may be lost Ascent Software User s Guide 3 39 3 2 7 8 Properties Properties Sheet menu or Use this command to change the sheet properties Most sheets except e g Advanced Copy New RunStatus and Steps have properties which can be changed in the Properties dialog Each sheet type has its own type of properties see example below Most sheet types include the Source sheet information and the possibility to change the View of the sheet 3 40 Ascent Software User s Guide Cut Off sheet properties ks 4 3 2 8 Process 3 2 8 1 Function Function Process menu Use
133. ced Copy function 3 50 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 4 Multipoint Multipoint Process menu The Multipoint feature is designed for large wells i e microplates with less than 96 wells whereby more than one measurement point per well can be measured Multipoint feature reduces the data to one value per well This is necessary since further data reduction cannot be performed if there is more than one measurement value per well In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet 3 2 8 4 1 Source Multipoint sheet properties j Calculation Source sheet name 1 v DK Apply e Source sheet name Select the sheet containing your measurement data Ascent Software User s Guide 3 51 3 2 8 4 2 Calculation Multipoint sheet properties Calculation type Average C Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum C Standard deviation Only one result per well is calculated from all the measurement points of the well The user can select how the measurement points will be calculated The different calculation types comprise Average Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum and Standard deviation The operation buttons are e OK Applies the selected calculation type used in the Multipoint calculations to the well s and closes the dialog e Cancel Cancels the dialog e Apply Applies the selected calculation type used in t
134. cess can be done using the keyboard or dragging the cursor with a pointing device such as a mouse The marked text is known as the se ection 3 To indicate an item in a menu menu bar button bar etc with the selection cursor before initiating an action serial interface A connection point through which information is transferred one digital bit at a time The rate may be high e g 10 megabits per second as in Ethernet or as slow as 110 bits per second via an RS232C interface The term is sometimes applied to interfaces such as the RS232C and RS422 in which the data is transferred serially via one path but some control signals can be transferred simultaneously via parallel paths Ascent Software User s Guide 4 147 serial port An input output socket on a computer or other device that is used for serial input output often making use of the RS232C standard The physical port may have a 25 or 9 pin subminiature D connector or an RJ45 connector which looks like a telephone connector From the software a serial port is usually treated as a device rather than a file session The software program is based on sessions The session contains the measurement parameters the instructions for the instrument and the measurement data processing defined by the user The user can create a new save the current and edit an old session Only one session can be edited at a time setup The preparation of a machine for a spe
135. cific work method activity or process specimen 1 A small amount or piece of something that is taken from a plant animal or human being so that it can be tested or examined 2 A single example of something 4 148 Ascent Software User s Guide spreadsheet A program that manipulates tables consisting of rows and columns of cells and displays them on the screen the cells contain numerical information and formulas or text Each cell has a unique row and column identifier but different spreadsheets use different conventions so the top left hand cell may be A1 1A or 1 1 The value in a numerical cell is either typed in or is calculated from a formula in the cell this formula can involve other cells The ability of the cells to store text is used to annotate the table with column headings titles etc The common characteristics of all spreadsheets is the way the screen of a computer acts as a window onto the matrix of cells if there are more rows and columns than will fit on the screen then the spreadsheet can be scrolled horizontally or vertically to bring into view previously hidden rows or columns To change a value it is only necessary to move the cursor into the required cell displayed on the screen and type in the new value status bar status line In many kinds of display including text and graphical user interfaces a line of usually textual information about current status A word processor status
136. containing your measurement data e Assay name Specifies the assay name for the source 3 2 8 6 Precalculation Precalculation Process menu This menu item creates a precalculation sheet which offers a possibility to carry out simple calculations such as subtractions and ratios with measurement data This sheet does not need a plate layout In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet Precalculation sheet properties Source sheet 1 Measuet Sheet 1 Sheet 2 C Sheet 2 Sheet 1 Measure Z C Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 2 Sheet 1 OK Cancel Apply Source sheet 1 Defines the name of the first source sheet e Source sheet 2 Defines the name of the second source sheet e Sheet 1 Sheet 2 The measurement data of the second sheet is subtracted from the measurement data of the first sheet e Sheet 2 Sheet 1 The measurement data of the first sheet is subtracted from the measurement data of the second sheet e Sheet 1 Sheet 2 The measurement data of the first sheet is divided by the measurement data of the second sheet 3 54 Ascent Software User s Guide e Sheet 2 Sheet 1 The measurement data of the second sheet is divided by the measurement data of the first sheet Note The Precalculation submenu is typically used e g in dual using two filters filter pairs measurements 3 2 8 7 Kinetic Processors Kinetic Processors Process menu
137. ction Precalculation Ratio Inhibition Curve Fit and Cut Off sheets can only be changed in the Number of decimals edit field on the right 3 82 Ascent Software User s Guide e Auto format The settings for the automatic formatting of decimals affect only measurement data i e RFU or RLU They do not however affect any other number formats If the Auto format is ticked the following rules apply Auto Result lt 1 4 decimals Result lt 10 3 decimals Result lt 100 2 decimals Result lt 1000 1 decimal Result 2 1000 0 decimals e Number of decimals The Number of decimals can range from 1 to 8 There are two Number of decimals edit fields belonging to different sheet types in the dialog e Use scientific format 0 00E 00 if absolute value is Numbers outside the defined range will be shown using exponential presentation in the sheets The operation buttons are e OK Applies the selected decimal format s to the sheets updates the default decimal format s and then closes the dialog e Cancel Cancels the dialog e Apply Applies the selected decimal format s to the sheets and updates the default decimal format s The default decimal format is pre set in Ascent Software and varies according to the instrument used see following table Ascent Software User s Guide 3 83 Instrument Number of decimals Number of decimals left edit field right edit field Fluoroskan Ascent Auto 3 Fluoroskan Asc
138. ctly defined connector types and pin assignments as well as electronic and logical signal protocols configuration 1 The particular hardware elements and their interconnection in a computer system for a particular period of operation 2 In configuration management the functional and physical characteristics of hardware or software as set out in documentation or achieved in a product Control menu A menu that contains commands you can use to manipulate the window Application icons and some dialog boxes also have a Control menu To open the Control menu you use the Control menu box at the left of the title bar in a window or you select an application icon copy To produce a replica of some stored information in a different part of the store or on a different storage device CR carriage return crosstalk A signal that has leaked or crossed from one communication channel to an adjacent channel This interferes with causes errors on the second channel In brief interference between two communication cables or channels Ascent Software User s Guide 4 133 cut To mark a piece of text or graphical information in some way read it into a temporary storage location and delete it from the original document The information may then be inserted into a new location It is often called a move or cut and paste by analogy with scissors and glue techniques database 1 Normally and strictly a bod
139. cument stand out HIS Acronym for Hospital Information System hot key A keystroke or combination of keystrokes that switches the user to a different program often a terminate and stay resident TSR program or the operating system user interface icon A small picture used in place of another entity Window managers often use icons to represent devices wastebaskets etc 4 138 Ascent Software User s Guide idle 1 Operational but not in use 2 Waiting for a command import The opposite to export To bring something in from outside a system to convert a file stored in one format to the default format used by a program initialization The act of assigning initial values to variables before the start of a computation insert 1 One of the basic actions performed on sets 2 One of the basic actions performed on lists that places a new element into a list not necessarily at one end or the other 3 An editing operation integer A whole number as opposed to a rational or real number The concept of integer type is used for computer representation of a finite subset of the integers invalid Not valid inverse video or reverse video A display attribute in which one or more characters are displayed in the opposite contrast to the surrounding information justify To achieve uniform vertical edges or columns of material printed or displayed on a screen Information can be aligned
140. d displays the Print dialog box where you can select printout s to print 2 1 2 6 Recently used file list The Session menu Recently used file list includes the names of five recent protocols for fast access 2 8 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 2 7 Exit Exit Session menu Use this command to exit the program You can also use the Close command in the Control menu of the program If changes have been made the program prompts you to save the Session before exiting 2 1 3 View 2 1 3 1 Desktop Bar Desktop Bar View menu The Desktop tabviews are located to the right of the active desktop The Desktop tabview selects the active desktop for the program When the desktop is changed the menus and tool bars also change IM m Use this command to view the Desktop Bar Ascent Software User s Guide 2 9 2 1 3 2 Status Bar Status Bar View menu When a command is selected the left side of the status bar briefly describes the command Normally the status bar shows the line state of the instrument the beam size the actual temperature and the current time Instrument status bar Connected to Fluoroskan Ascent FL 2 5 0 Normal beam 22 0 C 11 51 27 Note The status bar at the bottom of the screen also displays information about a selected command Message status bar Opens an existing session Use the Status Bar command in the View menu to display or hide the status bar 2 1
141. d follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation The SETUP first copies its setup files to your hard disk It searches for a location on the user s hard disk to copy its temporary files If the SETUP finds a workable temporary location it starts running the installation procedure Welcome to the Ascent Software Setup program This program will install Ascent Software on your d computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any partion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Ascent Software User s Guide 1 7 The installation procedure will prompt the following recommended computer requirements Requirements 1 8 Ascent Software User s Guide Then user information is requested User Information x Please enter your name the name of the company for whom you work and the product serial number Name user Company Thermo Labsystems Serial m 03 074 mo The serial number can be found on the CD cover The destination folder is where you want A
142. d footnotes The following illustration identifies the elements on a typical two dimensional 2 D chart Y axis Data Point Labels Grid line Data Point y axis title Tick Mark Category1 Category2 x axis title 4 72 Ascent Software User s Guide The following illustration identifies the elements on a typical three dimensional 3 D chart Y axis Value Data Point Z axis Series 4 3 2 Chart data grid Each chart is associated with a data grid This data grid is a table that holds the data that is being charted The data grid can also include labels used to identify series and categories on the chart The user who designs a chart application fills the data grid with information by inserting data or by importing data from a spreadsheet or array In most cases each column in the data grid translates into one series on the chart However the Program supports a number of chart types that require two or more columns of data to chart a series These chart types include XY polar bubble hi lo and gantt charts Ascent Software User s Guide 4 73 4 3 3 Chart types 4 3 3 1 Area charts Use area charts to emphasize the relative importance of values over a period of time An area chart focuses on the magnitude of change rather than the rate of change Each filled area on the chart represents a series and is identified by a different color or pattern Values are plotted on the vertical Y
143. der MF related Actions Check that the optics is not soiled and clean it if necessary Check that there is no leakage of light from outside the instrument into the measuring chamber If the error persists contact service Insert a plate holder in the carriage Try another holder Contact service Check that the optics is not soiled and clean it if necessary Check that there is no leakage of light from outside the instrument into the measuring chamber Try with another filter wheel If the error persists contact service Check that connector X6 on the reader PCB is properly inserted Check that the chopper wheel rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Continued 4 115 Message e Chopper position error e Filter wheel not in position e Filter wheel timeout e Filter wheel position error e Too high gain deviation between measurement channels e Invalid profile point number 4 116 Reason The detected chopper drum home position did not match the calculated chopper position The chopper drum is not rotating properly The filter wheel has been removed The filter wheel home position was not detected within the allowed time Either the wheel is not rotating or the position sensor is faulty The detected filter wheel home position did not match the calculated filter position The filter wheel is not rotating properly
144. down or across The Number of samples controls field is activated when samples and controls are edited The names of samples and controls are generated automatically by adding numbers to the name The maximum number of controls samples equals the size of the plate When you want to generate calibration or dilution series tick the Generate concentration dilution series check box The Generate concentration dilution series check box activates the other fields e g No of calibrators dilutions When the type of well is CALIBR you can enter the number of calibrators used in the calibration series in the of calibrators dilutions field The names of the calibrators are generated automatically by adding numbers to the item name Alternatively when the type of well is SAMPLE you can enter the number of dilutions used in the dilution series The names are not generated but the dilution series is made for the same item In the calibration series the concentrations are calculated according to the operators Multiply Divide Add or Subtract The Ascent Software User s Guide 2 29 calculation is made using the basic value the Concentration Dilution 1 field and the value in the By field In the dilution series the dilutions are calculated according to the operators Multiply Divide Add or Subtract The calculation is made using the basic value the Concentration Dilution 1
145. drag it into the Remove box at the bottom of the Steplist 2 1 5 15 Inactivate Inactivate Steps menu The Inactivate command is used if the user chooses not to carry out the step If the step is inactivated it will be crossed over with an X mark in the Steplist Otherwise the step is executed The Inactivate command can be used when you want to use an old calibration curve with plates that only have samples on For example you create two steps one for calibrators and the other for samples both with different layouts Then you run a calibration curve with the first step active and the second inactive In the following run you inactivate the first step and measure the samples with the second step active Ascent Software User s Guide 2 57 2 1 5 16 Activate Activate Steps menu The user can choose whether or not to carry out a certain step The Activate command is used if the user chooses to carry out the step The Activate command cannot be distinguished by any specific mark s compare above The default is that the step is carried out Only inactivated steps can be activated 2 1 5 17 Print Current Step Print Current Step Steps menu Use the Print current step command to print the current step Displays the Print dialog box where you can select the print options and print the step Note The appearance of the Print dialog box depends on the operating system used and the printer used 2 1 5 18 Print All Steps Print
146. e manual Refer to Section Before Installation in the Overview part of the manual Change the fit type transformation or the concentration Change the calibrator concentration Create a new curve fit sheet Continued 4 97 Message e Delete sheet Cannot delete e Error in sheet generation Nolayout found from the source sheet chain e source sheet available e source sheet name available e No space for a new sheet e Nota valid filename e Plate dimensions missing e Plate layout start coordinate missing e Sheet already exists e Sheet variable missing e Source sheet sizes are not the same e selected well type not found e The typed well name not found 4 98 Reason The Measure sheet is locked and cannot be deleted Sheet creation did not succeed The layout cannot be found in the source sheet The sheet given in the properties does not exist The sheet properties do not contain the source sheet name at all 1 Out of memory 2 The sheet cannot be created The name is not a valid name The hidden sheet specific data is corrupted or missing The hidden sheet specific data is corrupted or missing A sheet with the given name exists The hidden sheet specific data is corrupted or missing The plate size in source sheets one and two are different The selected well type is not found from the plate layout The typed well name
147. e before using the result files Ascent Software User s Guide 4 91 Pause step If you need to drive the plate out during a session and access the plate through some other automated process use the Pause step During the Pause step the plate is driven out and it can be manipulated When the system is ready to continue the session write a REMOTE CMD file with the CONTINUE command Example on how to demonstrate test remote functions Assuming that there are two sessions namely 1 and session2 sec it is possible to run Ascent Software continuously with the following batch file Contents of the remote bat file echo off if exist response txt del response txt Start echo choice C yn Ty 5 Continue if errorlevel 2 goto end 1 remote cm rename remote cm_ remote cmd waitl choice C yn Ty 5 Continue if errorlevel 2 goto end if not exist response txt goto waitl find C ERROR response txt if not errorlevel 1 goto error del response txt copy session 2 remote cm_ rename remote cm_ remote cmd wait2 choice C yn Ty 5 Continue if errorlevel 2 goto end if not exist response txt goto wait2 find C ERROR response txt if not errorlevel 1 goto error del response txt goto start error echo Error in response txt file end 4 92 Ascent Software User s Guide Contents of the session 1 file START session1 sec response txt Contents of the session 2
148. e contents of a cell in the table that corresponds to the location of the search value Syntax VLOOKUP search_item search range column index The search item is a value text string or reference to a cell containing a value that is matched against data in the top row of the search range The search range is the reference of the range table to be searched The cells in the first column of the search range can contain numbers text or logical values The contents of the first column must be in ascending order e g 2 1 0 2 A through Z False True Text searches are not case sensitive The column index is the column in the search range from which the matching value is returned The column index can be a number from 1 to the number of rows in the search range If the column index is less than 1 the Z VALUE is returned When the column index is greater than the number of rows in the table the REF is returned Remarks VLOOKUP compares the information in the first column of the search range to the supplied search item When a match is found information located in the same row and supplied column column index is returned If the search item cannot be found in the first Ascent Software User s Guide 4 69 column of the search_range the largest value that is less than the search_item is used When the search item is less than the smallest value in the first column of the search range the REF is returned
149. e graph if replicates are chosen markers become replicates 3 76 Ascent Software User s Guide e Mean Blank The user sees the Mean Blank value given in the Blank Subtraction sheet i e the mean of all the blank wells in a specified assay Otherwise if nonspecific plate blanks do not exist the text N A short for not available appears e Status Shows the status of the fitting e Fit type Shows the used fit type and fit formula e Transformation The used type of Data Transformation e Parameters Shows the fit parameters e RA The index of determination 22 is the correlation coefficient R to the power 2 and shows the goodness of the curve fit the greater the R the better the goodness of the fit is 3 2 8 10 Cut Off Cut Off Process menu In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet The colors of the names of the specimen in the Cut Off sheets are the same as the defined colors of the different well types i e calibrators controls blanks and samples see Section Setup Colors in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual Note Any modification in the sheet properties will erase user modifications and any added information However added information stays in the two comment columns in the list and the comment wells at the top of the page wells H3 H6 Refer to Section Curve Fit View item Concentration list in the Results Desktop part of the manual for example Ascent Software
150. e step name 1 The other sheet name is generated from the step name by adding the ending 2 The values within this sheet are raw data values Note Measure sheets containing raw data values are locked In other words they contain a locking mechanism so that the measurement results cannot be tampered with Ascent Software User s Guide 3 1 Measure sheet properties a xi Sheet Properties Integration time Result unit Integral Show times Close Cancel Apply In the Measure sheet properties dialog E or Sheet Properties the Show times check box can be selected The default setting is that the check box is not ticked i e the measurement times are hidden When the Show times check box is ticked however and the OK button or the Apply button is pressed the measurement times will be shown to the right of the raw measurement data in the same Measure sheet in the same format The measurement times are expressed in seconds The Measure sheet properties dialog also contains a selection for the raw data result unit Average default setting sets the result unit to be either RFU s fluorometry or RLU s luminometry When Average is selected all results are calculated per second and the result value is independent of the integration time Therefore the same sample will give the same numerical value with all possible integration times When Integral
151. ed If there are no logical values on the list the error value ZVALUE is returned AND IF and NOT functions OR 1 1 1 5 5 10 returns True because one of the arguments is true Returns the value of pi m which is approximately 3 14159265358979 when calculated to 15 significant digits PI Although the PI does not use arguments you must supply the empty parentheses correctly reference the function COS SIN and TAN functions Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 72 PRODUCT Description Multiplies list of numbers and returns the result Syntax PRODUCT number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers logical values text representations of numbers or reference to a range containing those values Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors If a range reference is included in the list text logical expressions and empty cells in the range are ignored All numerical values incl O are used in the calculation See Also FACT and SUM functions Examples PRODUCT 1 2 3 4 returns 24 4 2 2 73 PROPER Description Returns the specified string in a proper case format Syntax PROPER text The text is any string Remarks In the proper case format the first alphabetic character in a word is capitalized If an alphabetic character follows number punctuation mark or a space it is capita
152. ed when the dispenser units are primed or emptied 1 18 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 5 Basic concepts 1 5 1 Session The program is based on sessions A session contains a plate template a measurement dispensing area a plate layout steps and calculation information defined by the user The user can create a new save the current and load an old session Only one session can be loaded at a time When a new session is created the type of plate template is requested This template selection defines the dimensions of the plate and wells The user can enter the well specification with the plate layout Layouts can be saved as files and layouts can be loaded from files to the sessions In the Area definition window the user can select the wells to be measured 1 5 2 Desktops The Desktop is the main window area of the program There are two desktops available Procedure Desktop and Results Desktop 1 5 3 Procedure Desktop With the means of the Procedure Desktop module the user can define session steps Steps is a collection of basic operations which are executed for the defined area at a certain time When a new Session is created the user is requested to select a plate template which is based on predefined well parameters and point locations The creation of new areas and steps is based on this template selection Ascent Software User s Guide 1 19 i Ascent Software Version 2 6 T1H1 C ASW 26 DEFAULTC SEC
153. ef for the Fluoroskan Ascent session files and sel for the Luminoskan Ascent session files respectively Note You should not run Ascent Software in REMOTE mode and manually at the same time since this may cause some unexpected situations and a possible crash To avoid this you should have at least two icons one for normal use and one for remote use REMOTE CMD file The command set is described in the Ascent Software Remote Control Interface Interface based on files document This document describes the syntax of the commands which are START ABORT INSTRUMENT STATE KILL CONTINUE This file can be created using e g MS Notepad Start Programs Accessories Notepad START c ascento remote sec c ascento response txt Ascent Software User s Guide 4 87 raf Untitled Notepad OF x File Edit Search Help START c ascent remote sec c ascent response txt DO NOT forget to type the extensions Save the file in another directory c remote with the name REMOTE CMD Note that you have to select All Files as the Save As type Save in C3 remote c File name remote cmd Save as type Files Cancel 2 Using Explorer locate your c remote remote cmd file and copy select the file and while pressing the Ctrl key drag and drop this file into your Ascent c ascento directory 48 Ascent Software User s Guide Note for real robot systems It
154. eived but the lamp is off The shaker home position was not detected within the allowed time Either the shaker is not rotating or the position sensor is faulty The detected shaker home position did not match the calculated position The shaker is not rotating properly The reference channel signal level with one or more filters is not within limits after reference channel gains adjust The measurement results may be incorrect if this error is reported Actions Contact service Check and replace the lamp if necessary If the error persists contact service Contact service Check that the shaker stepper motor rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Check that the shaker stepper motor rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Check the reference channel optics the lenses to the far left for spills or any other stains and clean it if necessary Check the filters If the error persists contact service Continued 4 117 Message e Track timeout e Track position error e Invalid strip number e Invalid shake mode e Invalid shake speed e Invalid well number e Invalid temperature set value e reader cover is open 4 118 Reason The track stepper home position was not detected within the allowed time Either the track stepper is not rotating or the position sens
155. ell plates moving the plate is not required and simultaneous measurement and dispensing is possible Note The check box Dispense all and measure in General step Settings affects the Dispense And Measure step see General step Instrument Settings in the Overview part of the manual Ascent Software User s Guide 2 45 Parameters General Step name Dispense And Measurel Measure Unit Steptime hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 lp Volume 1 2 10000 20 _ Prime tip 5 oy ola Interval hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Dispenser 4 4 2 3 Measurement method Measurement type Integration time ms Lag time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Excitation Emission Pairs Filter 355 460 Overwrite general step settings Beam Normal Small The step is a combination of a Dispense step and a Measure step The parameters for the Dispense And Measure step are e Volume 1 2 1000 ul Defines the dispensing volume in steps of 1 ul increments e Interval hh mm ss s Defines the dispensing interval between the wells Prime tip 5 pl Primes 5 ul to the waste wells after each aspiration With small dispensing volumes this improves the dispensing precision of the first dispensing after aspiration e Dispenser from 1 to 3 The number of the dispenser you are using e Measure The Measure part is the same as that of a Measure step It contains the selection of either the fluorometric or
156. ells are filled manually A For a more enhanced filling the Fill dialog should be used B You can change the well type color by selecting Setup Color Note To properly update the existing results sheets the area definition and the plate layout should match If there is a mismatch you might get extra results Note Creating a plate layout is not necessary for basic measurements To select the well s click one of the wells in the window or keep the left mouse button down and drag it over the wells you want to select Parameters definition Layout Settings General Type BLANK zl Dilution Name Blank Assay Assay tea Clear all Cut Copy Paste 1 2 9 10 11 12 LANK sewPLE seMPLE seMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE saMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE A Blank Sample Samplei Sample25 Sample33 Sample4i 40 Sample57 Sample65 Sample73 8 B 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 t 11 1 11 CALIBR SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE stat Sample Sample10 Samplei8 Sample26 Sample34 Sample42 0 Sample58 Sample66 Sample74 82 B 000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 ICALIBR SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAM
157. en 1 and 255 that specifies an ANSI character Remarks The character and associated numeric code are defined by Windows in the ANSI character set See Also CODE function Examples CHAR 70 returns F CHAR 35 returns 4 2 2 14 CHOOSE Description Returns a value from a list of numbers based on the index number supplied Syntax CHOOSE index item list The ndex is a number that refers to an item on ist The index can be a cell reference The index can also be a formula that returns any value from 1 to 29 If ndex is less than 1 or greater than the number of items on the tem_ ist the VALUE is returned If the index is a fractional number it is truncated to an integer The tem ist is a list of numbers formulas or text separated by commas This argument can also be a range reference You can specify as 4 14 Ascent Software User s Guide See Also Examples many as 29 items on the list INDEX function CHOOSE 2 Q1 027 03 QA returns Q2 AVERAGE CHOOSE 1 1 10 B1 B10 C1 C10 returns the average of the contents of the range A1 A10 4 2 2 15 CLEAN Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Removes all non printable characters from the supplied text CLEAN text The text is any worksheet information Text that is imported from another environment may require this function CHAR and TRIM functions CLEAN Results amp CHAR 8 a
158. enser 3 1 100 Defines the dispensing speed of dispenser number 3 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 35 2 1 5 5 RunStatus RunStatus is the Status report of the last run of the Session If the session has not been run the RunStatus tab is not visible on the Procedure Desktop RunStatus is generated both in Procedure Desktop and Results Desktop They are exactly identical except for the grid lines in the RunStatus sheet generated on the Results Desktop The RunStatus sheet provides summary information on the session and comprises the session name program version instrument type and serial number starting time of the run and the actual temperature The RunStatus report also includes data about the steps In addition the RunStatus sheet reports the ending time of the run number of warnings and errors and the actual temperature Example printout Session CAASCSW26 DEFAULTC SEC Program version Ascent Software Version 2 6 Instrument Fluoroskan Ascent FL 0 0 0 Serial no 0000 000 Started at 28 02 02 15 54 03PM Actual temperature Amb temp Beam width Normal beam Dispensers 15253 Measure1 Started at 28 02 02 15 54 03PM Actual temperature Amb temp Run Done 28 02 02 15 54 05PM Total warnings 0 Total errors 0 Actual temperature 22 0 C 2 36 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 6 Measure Measure Steps menu or b Use this command to add a Measure measurement step to the Steplist The following measu
159. enser not responding Reason The dispenser did not recognize the command it received The temperature measuring system is calibrated at startup If the calibration correction is too big this error is reported The dispenser pump is not primed The dispenser pump tubing is not in operating position around the pump rotor The reader ensures before dispensing that the wells are present for all the columns to be dispensed into This error is reported if the check fails The dispenser did not report that the dispensing was completed within the allowed time Ascent Software User s Guide Actions Contact service Contact service Contact service Move the tubing cassette from rest position into operating position A faint click from a microswitch should be audible when the cassette is inserted in the operating position slot If the error persists contact service Insert strips in all the dispense columns If the error persists contact service 4 121 4 7 File types used in Ascent Software 4 7 1 Session files sec sed see sef sel ses Files produced by each session file lay pla vig Miscellaneous files txt vts xls 4 122 Work file types Fluoroskan Ascent FL session file Multiskan Ascent session file iEMS Ascent session file Fluoroskan Ascent or Fluoroskan Ascent CF session file Luminoskan Ascent session file session file of earlie
160. ensor is faulty The detected dispenser tips home position did not match the calculated position The tips drive motor is not rotating properly The dispenser tips home position was not detected within the allowed time Either the tips motor is not rotating or the position sensor is faulty The dispenser cannot dispense the required volume A command was received which referenced a strip outside the range 1 12 A temperature outside the range 14 40 C was requested The reader did not respond to a command from the dispenser The reader reported an error in the dispenser during dispensing Actions Check that the pump rotor rotates freely when the instrument power is off and the tubing is in rest position If the error persists contact service Check that the tips stepper motor rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Check that the tips stepper motor rotates freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Contact service Contact service Contact service If the error persists contact service Contact service Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Unknown dispenser command e high temperature measurement electronics offset in dispenser e Dispenser pump not primed e Dispenser tubing not in operating position e Wells must be present for dispensing e Disp
161. ent 1 Comment 2 which can be used for various purposes such as QC calculations text and formulas for displaying cut off interpretations 3 2 8 9 5 Example Curve Fit sheet Conc Meas Residual Sheet CopyOfMeasure1 Assay Assay1 Cal 1 1 000 2 140 1 350 0 350 Cal_2 10 000 15 120 9 935 0 065 Name Meas Conc Cal_3 100 000 150 815 99 682 0 318 Cal 4 1000 000 1512 115 1000 032 0 032 Cal 1 2 180 2 100 m 2 140 1 000 1400 Cal 2 15 390 1200 14 850 pon 15 120 10 000 i Cala 150420 5 pall es 151 210 mm 150 815 100 000 200 Cal 4 1515 080 500 150 CU 1512 115 1000 000 Mean Blank N A Status Remark Fit type Linear regression SVD y a b x Meas transformation Linear Conc transformation Linear Parameters a b 0 0983 1 5120 Corr coeff R2 1 0000 Calibrators 2 Standards A table of calibrator data calculated responses and residual concentrations DO NOT edit this table Residuals describe how good the fitting is Residuals are the calculated differences between the actual and the computed values If the mean of the measured calibrators becomes negative it is automatically disabled and shown in red Calibrator chart Calibrator data presented on a chart Calibrators can be enabled or disabled either as replicates or whole calibrators Disabled calibrator points are shown in th
162. ent FL Auto 3 Fluoroskan Ascent CF Auto 3 Luminoskan Ascent Auto 3 3 2 10 Help You can launch the Help application by selecting Help Help Contents from the main menu The following Help window will appear 2515 e gt Hide Back Forward Print Contents index l Search Glossary Fluoroskan Ascent 2 Fluoroskan Ascent 2 Introduction 2 Product Support Setting up the system Basic concepts Making applications Procedure Desktop menus Standard sheets Basic operations Results Desktop menus References This is the Help for Fluoroskan Ascent FL and Fluoroskan Ascent Inside the help you can often navigate using the images Click on an area in the image that changes the cursor into a hand Click for quick access to some of the help topics e Setting up the system e Making applications Result sheets References The Help main menu buttons are e Hide Hides the left hand side navigation window To display the navigation window again click the Show button that appears instead of the Hide button e Back Takes you back to the previous view in your view history 3 84 Ascent Software User s Guide e Forward Takes you to the next view in your view history e Print Prints a single topic or multiple topics You can access the help content in three different ways by selecting one of the following tabs e Contents Browse the help topics by subject e Index Type in a keyword or browse
163. ent directory Type or select the filename you want to open This list box lists the files with the extension you select from the List Files of Type list box e Directories Lists the current directory and any subdirectories which contain files Double click the directories and subdirectories to move through the list List Files of Type Lists the available file formats Select the file format you want to open Ascent Software User s Guide 3 35 e Drives Lists the available drives Select the drive that contains the worksheet you want to open e Network Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network 3 2 7 3 Save Sheet Save Sheet Sheet menu or xy Use this command to save the sheet Saves the active sheet This command replaces the previous version of the sheet with the current version The sheet is still displayed in the window Note When the Measure sheet is saved in txt and xls file formats it will contain hidden measurement times and plate layout information 3 36 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 7 4 Save Sheet As Save Sheet As Sheet menu Use this command to save the sheet with a new name Save Sheet as new sheelVTS V Default vts The sheet remains open You can also use this command to save files so they can be read in other applications e File Name S
164. ent sums 150 readings from the A D converter If the integration time is longer the result is the mean value of the number of 20 ms readings during the total integration time For example if a 100 ms integration is used the result is 150 readings 150 readings 150 readings 150 readings 150 readings 5 Longer than 20 ms integration times can be used to reduce background noise if the signal level of the sample is very low Lag time hh mm ss s The time before the measurement is started Overwrite general step settings By checking this check box you can define the area and the plate layout for this step different from those defined in the General step When Overwrite general step settings is selected the area definition layout and the settings of the General step are used as default for the current step These parameters can however be edited suitable for the step in question The fluorometric parameters are Filter pair The wavelength for the filter pair expressed in nanometers Select the appropriate wavelength from the drop down list Beam Normal or Small beam selection If the beam of the instrument is changed the beam state is updated If the beam in any Measure or Dispense And Measure step does not match the current beam when the session is started an error is reported The luminometric parameters are FL only Filter The wavelength for the filter expressed in nanometers Select the appropriate wavelengt
165. erage of the supplied numbers The result of AVERAGE is also known as the arithmetic mean AVERAGE number list The number list is a list of numbers separated by commas As many as 30 numbers can be included in the list and the list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers Text logical expressions or empty cells in a referenced range are ignored All numerical values incl O are used MIN and MAX functions AVERAGE 5 6 8 14 returns 8 25 AVERAGE C15 C17 returns 134 C15 C17 contains 24 144 and 234 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 12 CEILING Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Rounds up a number to the nearest multiple of a specified significance CEILING number significance The number is the value to round The significance is the multiple to which to round Regardless of the sign of the number the value is rounded up away from zero If the number is exact multiple of the significance no rounding occurs If the number or significance is non numerical the VALUE is returned When the arguments have opposite signs the ZNUM is returned EVEN FLOOR INT ODD ROUND and TRUNC functions CEILING 1 23459 05 returns 1 25 CEILING 148 24 2 returns 150 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 13 4 2 2 13 CHAR Description Returns a character that corresponds to the supplied ANSI code Syntax CHAR number The number is a value betwe
166. erence channel drift Too high PMT drift 4 112 Reason During startup the background signal is checked If there is too much noise in it this error is reported There is no signal through the reference channel This is detected during autocalibration The reference channel gain is adjusted during validation and autocalibration The validation gain is saved and if the resulting gain during autocalibration differs too much from the saved gain this error is reported The first autocalibration of a filter pair adjusts the PMIT voltage to obtain the same reading from the reference chip as was measured during validation If the resulting voltage differs too much from the one used in validation this error is reported Actions If the error persists contact service Change the lamp Revalidate the filter pair If the error persists contact service Revalidate the filter pair If the error persists contact service Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Nonvolatile parameters lost e Invalid filter position e fthere is only one source sheet it must be either dual or dual kinetic Ascent Software User s Guide Actions Contact service Reason The calculated checksum of nonvolatile parameters does not match the saved checksum Some or all of the nonvolatile parameters validation data stepper offsets serial number user factors are lost The lifetime of
167. es icons and menus to simulate the top of a desk dialog box or dialogue box dialog dialogue A simple window containing a title bar a message and one or more response buttons This kind of window will normally allow no other actions to take place until a button has been pressed Dialog boxes may also contain more complex objects such as radio buttons pull down menus or scroll bars directory A means of locating data items usually files A directory can be regarded as establishing a set of links between named data items and their locations in a direct access storage device A directory may contain the names of files and of other directories disable 1 To make a device inactive 2 To suppress the action of an interrupt DOS Short for MS DOS Microsoft Disk Operating System double click or double click The double click consists of two clicks of the same button typically the mouse in quick succession when performed too quickly or too slowly then the user s intention is misunderstood Double clicking carries out an action such as starting an application dpi d p i dots per inch Standard method used to describe the resolution capabilities of a dot matrix or laser printer or scanner that is expressed as the number of dots that a device can print or display per linear inch drag To move an item on the screen by selecting the item and then pressing and holding down the mouse
168. es the integration time of blanking If the value is 0 blanking is not executed If the value is between 1 100 the blanking time is approximately calculated as integration time x value 100 Round the result to the nearest 20 ms The maximum blanking time is 10000 ms before and after the Execute by 1 n wells setting Only used in luminometry FL only The Dispenser settings options are not CF With these settings you can adjust the speeds of the optional dispensers to gain optimal dispensing results The default setting 18 is suitable for a viscosity equal to that of water The dispenser speed setting defines the speed as of the maximum possible speed with that dispenser Dispenser 1 1 100 Defines the dispensing speed of dispenser number 1 Dispenser 2 1 100 Defines the dispensing speed of dispenser number 2 Dispenser 3 1 100 Defines the dispensing speed of dispenser number 3 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 27 1 5 5 1 4 RunStatus RunStatus is the Status report of the last run of the session The RunStatus tab appears after a run has been executed The RunStatus report is generated both on the Procedure Desktop and Results Desktop They are exactly identical except for the grid lines in the RunStatus report generated on the Results Desktop The RunStatus report provides summary information on the session and comprises the session name program version instrument type and serial number starting time of
169. essing results and reports You can define calculations and reports in the Results Desktop module Calculations comprise data handling and processing of results Various reports can be generated on the Results Desktop There you can create save and load worksheets which are filed together with other session information Each measurement step creates one sheet for the measured raw data to the Results Desktop The sheets are named automatically according to the corresponding measurement step The name of the raw results sheet is the same as the name of the measurement step e g Measure The reports to the printer are created in the spreadsheet environment The user can for example define the printout header page numbering fonts and the borders Reports are created in the same way as in a general worksheet environment Ascent Software User s Guide 1 43 1 8 1 8 Executing the Session You can run the Session by clicking the Start tool button or by selecting the Procedure command from the Execute menu During the procedure the Running window displays the step execution All created sheets are updated from run to run Example 1 Running a kinetic Measure step Running C ASCENT 3 DEFAULTF SEF 1 44 Ascent Software User s Guide Well Curves Ci x e Curves Shows the curves during the measurement The kinetic curves of all the measurement steps of a session can be monitored in the same window If
170. eve some desired effect wildcard A character that represents one or more other characters Wildcards are widely used in commands and text searches In filenames you can use the question mark to represent any single character and the asterisk to represent any character or group of characters that might match that position in other filenames For example EXE represents all files that end with the EXE filename extension wordwrap or word wrap The ability of a word processing program or a text editing program to break lines of text automatically to stay within the page margins or window boundaries of a document without the user having to do so with carriage returns as is typically necessary on a typewriter workfile Files with a very brief existence or where they simply carry information between one job and the next in sequence are called work files worksheet In a spreadsheet program a two dimensional matrix of rows and columns that contains cells which can themselves contain equations Ascent Software User s Guide 4 153 zoom in out A possibility to see information either more closely and detailed zoom by enlarging it or more remote and less accurately zoom out by diminishing it 4 154 Ascent Software User s Guide Ascent Software User s Guide 4 155 Manufactured by Distributed by Thermo Labsystems P O Box 208 FIN 00811 Helsinki Finland Tel 358 9 32
171. ew bar allows the user to scroll the tabviews by using the scroll buttons Some sheets are generated automatically such as Steps RunStatus and Measure sheets The Steps sheet describes parameters that were used in each procedure step The RunStatus sheet provides summary information on the session such as starting and ending times and possible problems during the measurement etc The Measure sheet name follows the given name of the Measure step so the sheet name can be something else than Measure This sheet contains measured raw data values without any modifications Ascent Software Version 2 616 NONAME SEC ic Session Edit View Print Format Sheet Process Setup Help po Ori Le e Steps RunStatus 1 CopyOfMeasurel Curve Fitl 4 35 Conc Meas CalcConc Residual 36 1 000 2 140 1 350 0 350 37 10 000 15 120 9 935 0 065 38 100 000 150 815 99 682 0 318 39 Cal 4 1000 000 1512 115 1000 032 0 032 40 Cal_1 2 180 41 2 100 2 42 2 140 1 000 M 43 b 44 Cal2 15 390 vm EI 45 14 850 46 15 120 10 000 i i Pm 47 Diab 48 Ca 3 150420 m Eds 49 151 210 m 50 150 815 100 000 51 x B2 Cal 4 1515 080 a 53 1509 150 8 54 1512 115 1000 000 55 Mean Blank N A 56 Status 57 Remark 58 Fit type Linear regression SVD y atb x 59 Meas transformation Linear 60 Conc
172. f a chart by changing the settings in a dialog box Dialog boxes can be displayed by making a selection from a menu or by double clicking the appropriate chart element 4 3 6 Floating menu Click the right mouse button anywhere within a chart to display the floating menu Once the menu appears use the left mouse button to select a menu item Clicking menu items followed by an arrow character displays a submenu The following table describes the purpose of each item in the floating menu Item Dialog box Purpose displayed General Format Chart Formats the ffill frame and shadow displayed on the chart backdrop and provides a convenient place to toggle on and off the display of the title legend footnote or the 2nd Y axis Plot Format Plot Changes the chart type stacks or unstacks chart series turns lines and markers on or off controls the location of the plot formats the plot backdrop reorders series sets chart type specific options and controls the 3 D chart formatting and lighting Series Series Format Series Controls the display of series plots a series on a secondary axis formats series appearance such as bar shape line style markers and fil colors sets series smoothing and formats statistics lines and guidelines Continued 4 80 Ascent Software User s Guide Item Series Label Series Data Point Series Data Point Label Axis Axis Axis Label Axis Title Legend Title Dialog box displa
173. f a computer raw data Data in the form in which it reaches a computer system from the outside world data that has not been processed read To sense and retrieve or interpret data from a form of storage or input medium The word is often used to qualify the meaning of a noun as in read head Ascent Software User s Guide 4 145 read only file A file that can be read or copied but not erased or modified The protection is maintained by the operating system and in multiuser systems can be made to depend upon the category of the user A file might be writeable by its owner read only to the owner s colleagues and inaccessible to everyone else relative addressing Usually either of two ways to expand a short specified address The first is se f relative addressing where the specified address is added to the address of the instruction generally the current contents of the program counter that contains the self relative reference to produce a direct address The second is base addressing in which the specified address is added to the contents of a base register containing a base address to produce a direct address remove Data information can be taken away from the place where it is by e g replacing erasing deleting cutting or rewriting run time The time at which a program begins to execute in contrast to the time at which it may have been submitted loaded compiled or assembled The a
174. g The maximum number of received characters is 2 Kbytes Note The abort command is always executed immediately Ascent Software User s Guide 4 95 4 6 Warning and error messages Usually the meaning of warning and error messages are self explanatory and any required correction is obvious However if the meaning of the message is unclear we recommend you to repeat the past action If the same message is generated once more study the service manual or contact your local dealer This chapter lists warning and error messages that the instrument or Ascent Software generates 4 6 1 Message e Could not open serial port COM NUMBER e Failed to open serial COM NUMBER e response from the instrument e Serial port framing error e Serial port parity error e Serial port receiver buffer overflow e Serial port receiver overrun error 4 96 Serial communication Reason The serial port is maybe used by another application The serial port is maybe used by another application The instrument and Ascent Software are not connected The serial cable may be damaged The serial cable may be damaged The computer did not get all the data from the serial port The computer did not get all the data from the serial port Actions 1 Close other applications 2 Reset the computer 3 Contact PC support 1 Close other applications 2 Reset the computer 3 Contact PC support
175. gs1 21 1 29 1 43 1 46 2 14 2 39 2 45 2 47 Ascent Software User s Guide xix P Parts of the screen desktops 1 1 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 19 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 36 1 40 1 41 1 43 1 46 2 1 2 2 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 24 2 36 2 42 2 51 2 52 2 54 2 55 2 57 3 1 3 3 3 6 3 7 3 14 3 15 3 18 3 21 3 64 3 77 4 90 4 127 4 128 menu 3 5 4 1 4 124 4 136 4 141 4 144 4 145 4 147 status bar seen 2 2 2 10 3 6 3 14 3 15 4 127 4 149 Steplist1 1 1 2 1 20 1 21 1 23 1 30 1 41 1 43 1 46 2 37 2 44 2 45 2 47 2 49 2 51 2 54 2 56 2 57 4 100 4 124 4 125 4 128 tabview 1 17 1 28 1 40 1 42 2 9 2 14 2 15 2 36 2 48 2 79 3 14 3 73 3 75 3 80 3 85 4 83 4 84 4 123 4 127 4 150 toolbar 1 43 2 1 2 2 2 9 2 10 2 11 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 14 3 15 4 124 4 ed ca ea ln 1 27 2 34 Plate template1 2 1 12 1 16 1 19 1 23 1 30 1 36 1 37 1 42 1 48 1 49 1 50 2 3 2 15 2 59 4 150 4 151 TERSS 3 46 4 76 4 78 4 80 4 83 4 84 2 39 2 40 2 74 2 75 2 76 4 111 4 112 DH 3 69 3 71 Prime tipis 2 ER 2 45 2 46 Print1 17 1 22 1 30 1 41 1 45 2 2 2 8 2 11 2 30 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 71 2 73 2 79 3 6 3 7 3 15 3 19 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 85 4 82 4 97 4 125 Add Col
176. h from the drop down list The default filter is None in luminometric measurements Use default PMT voltage By selecting this check box the standard factory calibration PMT photomultiplier tube voltage is used in the measurements This is selected as default and it gives the best Ascent Software User s Guide 2 39 possible performance for luminometric measurements The software obtains the actual voltage from the instrument and it can be viewed in the Instrument Status sheet e PMT voltage If the Use default PMT voltage check box is deselected you can change the PMT voltage value from 300 to 1000 The initial value is factory calibrated Changing this value may become necessary if very high signals are measured 2 1 5 6 2 Dual In the Dual measurement type each point is measured twice using two different filters luminometric filter pairs fluorometric at first with one filter filter pair and then with another Meas interval defines the interval time between the two measurements Parameters General Measuret Unit Step time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Measurement method Measurement type Dual Integration time ms Lag time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Excitation Emission Pairs Fiter pair Ma 00 00 00 0 Fitter pair 2 355 gt 460 z Overwrite general step settings Beam Normal Small For more details on general parameters see section Single on p 2
177. h range is returned Syntax MATCHUookup value lookup range comparison The ookup value is the value to compare to It can be a number text or logical value or a reference to a cell that contains one of those values The ookup range is the range to search and contains only one row or one column The range can contain numbers text or logical values The comparison is a number that represents the type of comparison to be made between the ookup value and the values in the lookup range When you omit this argument the comparison method 1 is assumed When the comparison is 1 the largest value that is less than or equal to the ookup value Ascent Software User s Guide 4 39 4 40 Remarks See Also is matched When using this comparison method the values in the ookup range have to be in ascending order e g 2 1 0 1 2 A through Z False True When the comparison is 0 the first value that is equal to the ookup value is matched When using this comparison method the values in the ookup range can be in any order When the comparison is 1 the smallest value that is greater than or equal to the lookup value is matched When using this comparison method the values in the lookup range have to be in descending order e g True False Z through A 2 1 0 1 2 When the comparison method 0 is used the ookup_value is text the ookup_value can contain wild card characters The w
178. have the F alignment they are filled as well Justify Aligns wrapped text see the Word Wrap paragraph below within a cell to the right and left You must have more than one line of wrapped text to see the justification Center Across Cells Centers a cell entry across the selected cells e Vertical Top Aligns the cell contents along the top of the cell Center Centers the cell contents to the middle of the cell Bottom Aligns the cell contents along the bottom of the cell e Word Wrap Also known as wraparound Displays long strings of text on multiple lines within a cell Wrapped text may be left aligned right aligned centered or justified in a cell 3 32 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 6 5 Cell References Cell References Format menu Searches the selected area or the entire worksheet for a specified Find reference address and replaces it with the Replace with Reference Address type Cell References Find Reference Address Relative Row Relative Column 1 Whole Sheet gt Relative Row Absolute Column A 1 gt Selected Area gt Absolute Row Relative Column 1 gt Absolute Row Absolute Column A 1 v Prompt on Replace Replace with Reference Address Relative Row Relative Column Al gt Relative Row Absolute Column A 1 Replace gt Absolute Row Relative Column 1 Replace All gt Absolute Row Absolute Column A 1 Current Cell Data
179. he VALUE is returned When the row index is greater than the number of rows in the table the REF is returned Remarks The HLOOKUP compares the information in the top row of the search range to the supplied search item When a match is found information located in the same column and supplied row row index is returned If the search item cannot be found in the top row of the search range the largest value that is less than the search is used When the search item is less than the smallest value in the first row of the search range the REF is returned See Also INDEX LOOKUP MATCH and VLOOKUP functions Ascent Software User s Guide 4 27 4 2 2 36 HOUR Description Returns the hour component of the specified time in a 24 hour format Syntax HOUR seria _number The seria _number is the time expressed as a serial number The decimal portion of the number represents the time as a fraction of the day Remarks The result is an integer ranging from 0 12 00 AM to 23 11 00 PM See Also DAY MINUTE MONTH NOW SECOND WEEKDAY and YEAR functions Examples HOUR 34259 4 returns 9 HOUR 34619 976 returns 23 4 2 2 37 IF Description Tests the condition and returns the specified value Syntax IF condition true value false value The condition is any logical expression The true value is the value to be returned if the condition evaluates to True The fa se value is the value to be returned if
180. he Multipoint calculations to the well s The results from Multipoint calculations can be used in further calculations i e curve fits cut offs precalculations and various sheets can be combined Note Disabled values in Measure sheets affect the calculation results in Multipoint calculations 3 52 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 5 Blank Subtraction Blank Subtraction Process menu The blank well s is are subtracted automatically from the source sheet and the result is displayed in this sheet If a blank has been defined in the plate layout the blank is automatically subtracted in this sheet If several blanks are involved the mean of the blanks is subtracted The calculated mean blank value used in the blank subtraction calculation will be displayed in well D2 in the blank subtraction sheet The mean blank value will also be displayed in Curve Fit and Cut off sheets If no blank value is available the text N A will be displayed instead of the mean blank value The mean blank value is calculated as the average of all non specific blanks in the layout If no non specific blanks are defined the text N A will be displayed in well D2 In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet Blank sheet properties Sheet name Measurel Assay name OK Cancel Apply Ascent Software User s Guide 3 53 e Source sheet name Select the sheet
181. heet names are case sensitive Otherwise there will be an Application error The results txt file can look like this in Excel Session c ascento remote sec Started at 30 12 1997 14 19 Filter pair Ex 485 Em 538 nm 1 2 3 4 5 6 A 1 309 2 373 12 881 48 405 150 513 25 494 B 1 28 2 017 10 864 45 796 143 511 24 079 C 1 322 3 137 11 272 43 611 139 964 22 321 D 1 218 1 791 11 02 43 365 141 633 21 709 E 1 515 4 7 19 24 75 308 223 062 107 191 F 1 554 6 124 23 027 82 877 231 391 116 059 G 1 668 6 495 23 194 78 094 230 964 20 708 H 1 749 6 242 22 933 79 244 230 82 21 16 AVG 1 452 4 11 16 804 62 088 186 482 44 84 MIN 1 218 1 791 10 864 43 365 139 964 20 708 MAX 1 749 6 495 23 194 82 877 231 391 116 059 STD 0 184 1 883 5 452 16 964 42 742 38 65 Data extends to 12 columns gt Note Another way of saving sheets is to have a Save Load step Sheet Steps your session and check the Autoname file function Note for real robot systems Even when Ascent Software writes the results as a separate file the system control software should monitor the response txt file not the other result file That is because Ascent Software can still write the rest of the results in the file when this result file is seen by the system control software When the response txt file is made Ascent Software has performed all the actions and the results file can be used It is also recommended to verify that there are no error messages in the response txt fil
182. ical languages tab Short for tabulate i e to lay out data and for tabulation character a control character used when laying out data to control the movement of a print or display mechanism The tab key may initiate the tabulation function or may be used for other control purposes template 1 The dimensions of the used microplate The plate templates are expressed in units of 1 10 mm 2 A pattern that specifies a structure i e a relationship between parts of a compound data object from which instances may be made The term is a convenient means of differentiating the structure specification from the declaration of individual instances of the structure 4 150 Ascent Software User s Guide template editor The template editor in the Setup menu allows the user to create and modify plate templates text box In a dialog box a box in which you type information needed to carry out a command The text box may be blank or may contain text when the dialog box opens timeout or time out time out 1 logoff procedure carried out if no data is entered on an online terminal 2 period of time reserved for an operation title bar The horizontal bar at the top of a window that contains the title of the window or dialog box On many windows the title bar also contains the Control menu box and Maximize and Minimize buttons toggle 1 An electronic device with two states or a program
183. ignal Ascent Software User s Guide Reason The dispenser plunger did not reach the target position The dispenser valve did not reach the target position The dispenser valve is in bypass position More commands were sent to the dispenser than it could buffer The dispenser is not responding Too much time has passed from the last autocalibration The precision of the results may suffer The timing requirements of the session are too tight and cannot be fulfilled The measured signal gives a full scale reading The calculated result exceeds the numeric range of the instrument During startup the background signal is checked If it is too high this error is reported Actions If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service The timing requirements of the session are too tight there is no time to carry out the autocalibration Modify the session so that there is time to autocalibrate Relax the timing requirements Ensure that the filter pair is suitable for this measurement Dilute the samples In luminometric mode decrease the PMT voltage Decrease the user factor value If the error persists contact service Continued 4 111 Message Instrument background signal noise level too high Lamp failure Too high ref
184. ild card characters are an asterisk which matches any sequence of characters and a question mark which matches any single character When no match is found for the ookup value the ZN A is returned HLOOKUP INDEX LOOKUP and VLOOKUP functions Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 58 MAX Description Returns the largest value on the specified list of numbers Syntax MAX number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers logical values text representations of numbers or reference to a range containing those values Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors If a range reference is included in the list text logical expressions and empty cells in the range are ignored If there are no numbers on the list O is returned See Also AVERAGE and MIN functions Examples MAX 50 100 150 500 200 returns 500 MAX A1 F12 returns the largest value in the range 4 2 2 59 MID Description Returns the specified number of characters from a text string beginning with the specified starting position Syntax MID text start position num chars The text is the string from which to return characters The start position is the position of the first Ascent Software User s Guide 4 41 character to return from the text If the start_position is 1 the first character in the text is returned If the start
185. ile is a user generated layout file that is named manually with the Save As function e SaveAs Opens the list of layout files The name of the file be saved can be typed or selected from the list of existing pla files You can save files only with the pla extension e Fill Opens the Fill dialog to enable a more automated filling of the wells with user defined parameters Clear all Clears the whole plate layout Cut Cuts the selected well specifications into the clipboard Copy Copies the selected well specifications into the clipboard Paste Pastes the well specifications from the clipboard Ascent Software User s Guide 2 25 Fill by using the fields Select the type of the well from the drop down list and enter the name of the item You can also key in a concentration for the calibrator or enter a dilution 1 n for the sample You can specify Assay for all types of wells Press the Apply button to apply the data to the well s The data of all replicates is changed at the same time except for the SAMPLE type The names of the specific blanks are also changed if the name of the original sample is changed The editability of the fields depends on the selection in the Type field If several wells of different types are selected with the mouse drag only Assay can be edited If all the selected wells have the same type and name Name can also be edited Concentration Dilution 1 can be edited when all the
186. ile structures All the initial and setup information is in ASCII format The end characters of the fields are CR and LF and they are included in the field sizes 1 10 3 Importing and exporting Connections to other programs are done via the Clipboard All the worksheets can be saved and read in the ASCII text or Excel 4 0 format 1 10 4 Backup Backup is recommended in order to avoid data loss in case of hard drive crash or if a computer virus attacks your system The most important files are your work files sef Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF sec Fluoroskan Ascent FL vtg vtb lay and pla Note If you want to make a backup of a session make sure you save all four session specific files sef sec vtg vtb and lay Ascent Software User s Guide 1 51 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 Procedure Desktop 2 1 Menus procedure 2 1 1 General Session View Execute Steps Setup Options Help 3 d Commands are grouped in menus Some commands carry out an action immediately others display a dialog box where you can select options You can quickly choose the most commonly used commands by using the mouse to click the button on the tool bar Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 Menu layout Session View Execute Steps New Desktop Bar Procedure Measure Open Status Bar Plate In Incubate Save Tool Bar Plate Out Shake Save As Tabs Bar On Prime Dispense Pr
187. in The Kinetic rate is calculated per second or per minute Ignore first n readings Ignores a defined number of readings Starts from the first reading Ignore last n readings Ignores a defined number of readings Starts from the last reading Maximum rate If the maximum rate is selected the program searches the data for the maximum rate found in each well To obtain the maximum rate a series of linear curve fits will be performed for different segments of the fluorescence luminescence vs time curve The first segment starts at the first data point within the selected time and fluorescence luminescence range the second segment starts at the second data point etc until all the data points have been analyzed All the rate calculations are evaluated to determine the maximum rate In other words the LLS fit of m span points are sequentially fitted through each of the n data points There will be n m 1 curves produced from this The number of data points in a segment is specified by the user The maximum rate option is useful if you are not able to select the linear part of the curve using fluorescence luminescence and time limits Undefined Searches for the absolute maximum rate If the highest absolute rate value is increasing it will be presented with the prefix If the maximum rate is decreasing it will uu be presented with the prefix Increasing Searches for the maximum increasing rate The rate is pre
188. in luminometric measurements only Actions Change the plate type or remove all the Dispense steps from the Session Change the plate type or remove all the Dispense steps from the Session Change the integration time or some other parameters Use only measurement methods that can be measured by the reader Ensure that the light guard is installed Ensure that the light guard is removed before any measurements are carried out If carrying out a luminometric measurement ensure that the instrument cover is closed Ascent Software User s Guide 4 6 11 Message Air blank failed The plate holder is not inserted Measurement channel gains not within limits Chopper timeout Reason Either the signal level on one or more channels was too high when measuring with the light path blocked or there was too high a signal level deviation between the channels when measuring air The plate holder is checked to be inserted in the carriage before driving the carriage into the reader If the holder is not inserted this error is reported The measuring channel signal levels with one or more filters are not within limits after channel gains adjust The measurement results may be incorrect if this error is reported The chopper drum home position was not detected within the allowed time Either the drum is not rotating or the position sensor is faulty Ascent Software User s Guide iEMS Rea
189. in the interpretation matrix and interpretation list 3 2 8 10 3 View The user can select the items shown on the screen and printout in the View tab The report consists of everything that has been carried out The Cut Off sheet can be used as a report sheet and in the View tab different layout options can be selected 3 80 Ascent Software User s Guide Cut Off sheet properties SE lt 4 e Plate layout matrix Adds a layout map with defined names e Source data matrix Adds a source data matrix to the Cut Off sheet e Interpretation matrix Adds an interpretation matrix to the Cut Off sheet e Interpretation list Adds an interpretation list to the Cut Off sheet Ascent Software User s Guide 3 81 3 2 9 Setup 3 2 9 1 Number Number Setup menu Use this command to change the number of decimals in the different sheets Setup number of decimals Sheets Sheets Measure Blank Subtraction Kinetic processors Precalculation Multipoint Curve Fit Cut Off Ratio Inhibition Auto format Number of decimals ES Number of decimals 3 EI Use scientific format 0 00 00 if absolute value is Below 0 0001 Over 0000 Cancel Apply Sheets The number of decimals in the Measure Kinetic Processors and Multipoint sheets can be changed either through the Auto format check box or the Number of decimals edit field on the left The number of decimals in the Blank Subtra
190. inction between upper and lower case letters cell 1 An address a location in memory or a register usually one capable of holding one bit 2 The basic unit of a spreadsheet or some other table of text formed by the intersection of a row and column It contains a label value or formula with attributes such as size font and color 3 The name given to a packet in one version of a packet switching system Packet switching systems subdivide the data to be transmitted into a number of packets Centronics interface A standard plug compatible parallel interface for printers first used in printers manufactured by Centronics Corp check box A small square in a dialog box with an option alongside allowing the option to be selected or cleared Multiple check boxes allow as many options as needed to be selected Ascent Software User s Guide 4 131 checksum or check total Program which checks that data retrieved from memory is correct summing it and comparing the sum with a stored value chopper 1 Light interrupter used to produce a c output from a photocell 2 Mechanical or semiconductor switch used to modulate a d c signal so that it can be amplified by an a c amplifier An output chopper may be operated in synchronism with the input chopper in order to rectify the amplified signal clear An instruction that causes a designated variable register or counter to be set to the all zero
191. ines the plate height Well count X 1 36 Defines the number of wells in the X direction Well count Y 1 24 Defines the number of wells in the Y direction Well diameter X 1 1290 Defines the well diameter in the X direction Well diameter Y 1 900 Defines the well diameter in the Y direction Well start X 80 670 Defines the position of the first well measured from the edge of the plate Enter the center point of the first well in the X direction Well start Y 40 450 Defines the position of the first well measured from the edge of the plate Enter the center point of the first well in the Y direction Corner well distance X 0 1340 Defines the distance between the corner wells Enter the distance in the X direction Corner well distance Y 0 900 Defines the distance between the corner wells Enter the distance in the Y direction Well type Circle sets the shape of the wells to be circular Rectangle sets the shape of the wells to be rectangular Ascent Software User s Guide 2 61 2 1 6 2 Filters Filters Setup menu In the Filters setup menu the filter and filter pair information is modified You can add remove validate and scale filters filter pairs To modify luminometric filter parameters place the cursor in the luminometric list before pressing any push buttons Fluoroskan Ascent FL only In the validation procedure a new filter pair is introduced into the autocalibration system
192. int Procedure Empty Dispense And Measure Exit Results Pause Save Load Print Remove Inactivate Activate Print Current Step Print All Steps Setup Options Help Plate Templates Help Contents Filters About Password Dispensers Colors Printout Instrument Status The menu commands are described in the following chapters 2 2 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 2 Session 2 1 2 1 New New Session menu or You can create a new session with the New command The program proposes a default name for the session NONAME SEF Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF NONAME SEC Fluoroskan Ascent FL New Session Templates Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Strip Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate w adapl Thermo Labsystems Microlite 96 Plate E 384 Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE 384 with adapte Dynex 96 well Microlite plates 96 Wells GENERIC 96 w ells CORNING 25860 96 wells COSTAR 3596 96 wells NUNC N 167008 96 w ells FALCON 3072 96 wWells FALCON 3075 The dialog list box contains all the plate template definitions found in the file Ascent Software User s Guide 2 3 If the current session has been modified and has not been saved an option to save the changes is given Warning Session has been modified Do you want to save changes No Cancel 2 1 2
193. int of the sliding window in seconds instead of the rate itself Undefined Searches for the absolute maximum rate see Maximum rate above and returns the corresponding time as a positive number Increasing Searches for the maximum increasing rate see Maximum rate above and returns the corresponding time as a positive number If no increasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Decreasing Searches for the maximum decreasing rate see Maximum rate above and returns the corresponding time as a positive number If no decreasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Ascent Software User s Guide 3 59 Window 2 1000 The number of consecutive readings to use for evaluation e Time to maximum rate 2 The time to maximum rate 2 is the time taken to reach half of the maximum rate The maximum rate is determined as above This rate is halved and the data is scanned to determine the first rate which exceeds this rate Undefined Searches for the absolute maximum rate see Maximum rate above calculates the half of the maximum rate and returns the corresponding time as a positive number Increasing Searches for the maximum increasing rate see Maximum rate above calculates the half of the maximum rate and returns the corresponding time as a positive number If no increasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Decreasing Searches for the maximum decreasing rate see Maximum rate above calculates
194. interval in which the measured calibrator values lie Note If Extrapolate is not selected and the calibrators have replicates then the value s of the lowest calibrator under the calculated average for the replicates will be listed lt min Correspondingly the value s of the highest calibrator over the calculated average for the replicates will be listed gt max Note Extrapolated values in bold facetype e Effective Dose The Effective Dose or ED calculation scales the calibration curve A percent scale is plotted on the Y axis instead of the measured value A selected signal specified by the selected well type and typed well name is set to 10096 The user can also select the maximum value of the specified type through the Use maximum value selection The signal of all other measurements is calculated as the percentage of the maximum signal It is possible to define three different ED values ED1 ED2 and ED3 and obtain the corresponding concentrations automatically calculated for these see figure below Ascent Software User s Guide 3 67 Example ll Curve fit sheet pro 1200 1000 L a i IB qm Crab i a a a 5 15 m 25 x Concentrations Mean Blank 670 7317 Status Remark Fit type Linear regression SYD y a b x Meas transformation Linear Conc transformation Linear Parameters a b 3 33 05
195. inting down the sheet Left To Right Numbering and printing proceed from the first page to the pages to the right and then move down and continue printing across the sheet e Center Centers the data on the page within the margins vertically horizontally or both Print Options Grid Lines If selected prints horizontal and vertical cell grid lines in worksheets Black amp White Prints cells and drawing objects in black and white Anything in the foreground that is not entirely white is printed black Anything in the background that is not entirely black is printed white If you formatted your data with colors but print on a black and white printer select this option If you use a color printer but want faster printing selecting this option may reduce the printing time 3 22 Ascent Software User s Guide Row and Column Headings Prints row numbers and column letters in the A1 reference style or numbered rows and columns in the R1C1 reference style Scale Reduces the sheet or selection during printing to fit onto the specified number of pages Fit To Page s In most cases it is worthwhile to select this option to save paper Pages Wide You can change the figure of pages wide This figure does not normally have to be changed The default figure is 1 Pages wide can range from 1 to 100 Pages High You can change the figure of pages high This figure does not normally have to be changed The default figure is 19
196. iption Determines if the specified expression returns an error value Syntax ISERR expression The expression is any expression Remarks If the expression returns any error except the N A True is returned Otherwise False is returned See Also ISBLANK ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions Examples ISERR A1 returns True if A1 contains a formula that returns an error e g NUM Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 43 ISERROR Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Determines if the specified expression returns an error value ISERROR expression The expression is any expression If the expression returns any error value e g N A VALUE REF DIV 0 NUMI NAME or NULL True is returned Otherwise False is returned ISBLANK ISERR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions ISERROR 4 0 returns True ISERROR A1 returns False if A1 contains a formula that does not return an error 4 2 2 44 ISLOGICAL 4 32 Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Determines if the specified expression returns a logical value ISLOGICAL express on The expression is any expression If the expression returns a logical value True is returned Otherwise False is returned ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions ISLOGICAL ISBLANK A1 returns True because ISBLANK ret
197. is recommended to create edit a file with another name than remote cmd e g remote cm in the Ascent directory When the file is ready it should be renamed remote cmd by using the rename command rename remote cm remote cmd In this way the file is ready and free not half ready or used by another program when Ascent Software detects it As soon as you have copied the file Ascent Software recognizes the file opens the file and starts to run the defined session remote sec Once the run is completed in this example a response file named response txt is generated in the defined directory c ascento The file can look like this HEADER Instrument Type Fluoroskan Ascent FL 1 8 Instrument Serial Number 374000 007 0C COM 0 Date Time Started 30 12 1997 13 6 20 Date Time 30 12 1997 13 6 45 Input_Filename c ascento remote sec Output_Filename c ascento response txt RESULT_FORMAT Plate_Type 96 Number_of_Plate_Data 1 Number Columns 12 Number Rows 8 Column Dimension 1 Row Dimension 1 DATA01 ROW1 1 365290 1239231 2 390992 1239237 12 775000 ROW2 1 247860 1239470 2 038040 1239464 10 887500 ROW3 1 314892 1239577 3 107760 1239583 11 355630 ROW4 1 214340 1239816 1 801290 1239810 10 971920 ROW5 1 509920 1239924 4 712982 1239930 19 167600 ROW6 1 556931 1240163 6 065250 1240157 23 241800 ROW7 1 629191 1240270 6 431550 1240276 23 153000 ROWS8 1 763220 1240509 6 358040 1240503 22 923640
198. is title text Any grid line Ascent Software User s Guide Dialog box Format Chart Format Footnote Format Title Format Legend Format Legend Format Plot Format Axis Label Format Axis Format Axis Title Format Axis Tab Backdrop Text Text Backdrop Font Type Font Scale Text Grid Continued 4 83 To format 3 D Base or Wall Series Data Point Series Label Data Point Label Double click Anywhere on the base or wall other than a grid line A chart element in an unselected series or the legend key identifying the series A selected data point or a point in the same series as a selected data point The series label The data point label Dialog box Format Plot Format Series Format Data Point Format Series Label Format Data Point Label 4 3 8 Using dialog boxes Tab Base amp Walls Line for line type series Fill for all others Options or Fill if series defaults have been overridden Options or Text if series defaults have been overridden Options or Text if series defaults have been overridden Most dialog boxes provide sets of options grouped on separate tabs As you click each tab the controls in the dialog box change to allow you to edit a different set of options Any options that are not appropriate for the current chart type or situation are applied with gray shading 4 84 Ascent Software
199. isible All Hide Select if you want all sheets to be hidden Note Only selected sheets are visible 3 2 4 6 Arrange Sheets Arrange Sheets View menu Use this command to arrange active sheets You can change the order of the sheets by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the list item into a suitable position You can also change the order of the sheets with the Up and Down buttons S Arrange Sheets xl Arrange sheets using the Up Down buttons or left button of the mouse Sheet Blank1 Curve Fiti CopyOfCurve Fiti Cancel e Sheet Contains the list of existing sheets e Up Moves the selected sheet one step up e Down Moves the selected sheet one step down Ascent Software User s Guide 3 17 3 2 4 7 Zoom In Zoom In Format menu or A Zooms in the display at 10 intervals 3 2 4 8 Zoom Out Zoom Out Format menu or Al Zooms out the display at 10 intervals 3 2 4 9 Procedure Procedure View menu Use this command to view the Procedure Desktop Return to the Results Desktop through the Results View command or by pressing the Results Desktop bar 3 2 4 10 Results Results View menu Use this command to view the Results Desktop Return to the Procedure Desktop through the Procedure View command or by pressing the Procedure Desktop bar 3 18 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 5 Print 3 2 5 1 Add Page Break Add Page Break Print men
200. it eei toto 4 116 ig vr 2 42 Dual 1 28 2 37 2 40 2 42 2 46 2 47 2 78 3 1 3 3 3 55 3 56 4 113 Dual kinetic 1 28 2 37 2 42 2 47 2 78 3 1 3 3 3 56 Kinetic1 2 1 28 1 46 2 37 2 41 2 42 2 46 2 50 2 78 3 3 3 6 3 55 3 56 3 58 3 59 3 82 MON ItOLS ccccceceesseeeeeeeeeenees 1 28 2 37 2 43 2 45 2 47 2 78 3 3 3 56 Single eee 1 28 2 37 2 38 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 45 2 46 Menu floating 1 30 2 17 2 23 4 80 4 137 Eo 2 2 3 6 Moving type Redes ee act 1 26 2 32 4 67 N Navigate 1 35 2 28 2 30 2 31 Network 101021 1 2 5 2 6 2 8 3 26 3 36 3 38 4 128 4 140 Next 111 enne 1 10 3 33 3 42 3 43 3 44 Number of decimals essen 3 82 3 83 3 84 O ORF iocis t ar ta eoe Eee naa E ER Ta e 2 49 2 50 2 51 OK button 1 7 1 49 2 15 2 16 2 65 3 2 3 45 3 52 3 69 3 83 IS Eti TINTE 2 49 2 50 2 51 Operning Sessions imer re ER ERE 1 15 Operation buttons 1 33 1 35 1 49 2 60 3 12 3 33 3 52 3 83 Options 1 3 1 6 1 45 2 2 2 48 2 52 2 53 2 71 2 77 3 22 3 25 4 84 Overwrite general step settin
201. k the measurement wells by painting the area The selected wells will turn yellow You can change the selection as many times as you wish With the Remove tool you can erase undesired points 1 8 1 4 Defining the plate layout By selecting the Layout tabview you will see the plate layout You can specify the well definition You can use either the fields in the Layout window or the Fill dialog 1 42 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 8 1 5 Selecting Steps to the Procedure The General step is always the first step in the Steplist Select the other steps to the Steplist from the Procedure Tool Bar or from the Steps menu You can change the step order in the Steplist by dragging the step button and dropping it into another place Any step except the General step can be removed by dragging it into the Remove box Every measurement step generates worksheets to the Results Desktop module Worksheets are named according to the corresponding Step name The naming convention requires a different name for each measurement step i e if not given 1 2 A unique name is created automatically with the step and when editing this field you need to keep the names unique 1 8 1 6 Defining parameters to Steps Every step has a default name and a group of default parameters The default Step name and parameter values can be changed To define the specific area and layout you have to click the Overwrite general step settings check box 1 8 1 7 Proc
202. ken from each measurement point E Parameters General Step name Measurel Measure Unit Step time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Measurement method Measurement type Single Integration time ms Lag time hh mm ss s 00 00 00 0 Excitation Emission Pairs Filter pair Overwrite general step settings Beam Normal Small The general parameters for all the measurement types are e Step name The name of the step The name is generated automatically or given by the user and must be unique e Unit The measurement unit for the reading You can enter a nine character long string as the name of the unit e Step time hh mm ss s The time spent before advancing to the next step The time is expressed as hh mm ss s where hh stands for hours mm for minutes ss for seconds and s for milliseconds e Measurement method FL only Selection of the measurement method either fluorometric or luminometric e Measurement type The measurement type is selected e g Single e Integration time from 20 ms to 1000 ms in the fluorometric method and from 20 ms to 1 h in the luminometric method with the measurement type Single Execute by 1 n wells and from 20 ms to 2 38 Ascent Software User s Guide 10 s with other parameters in the luminometric method Defines the length of time used to obtain one measurement result from a measurement point The minimum time is 20 ms during which time the instrum
203. ks and reads or writes magnetic patterns that correspond to the data to be retrieved or stored gain The increase in the amplitude of a signal as of voltage current or power that is produced by a circuit Gain can be expressed as a factor or in decibels Ascent Software User s Guide 4 137 grid mesh The result of subdividing a region in time and or space into smaller subregions A rectangular region in the x y plane can thus be divided into smaller rectangles by lines parallel to the x and y axes The points of intersection of the lines are called the grid or mesh points A discretization method replaces differential equations defined in a region by a finite set of equations which define approximations to the exact solution at the grid points The finite difference and finite element methods are important methods of this general type handshake or handshaking An exchange of signals that establishes communications between two or more devices The handshake synchronizes the devices and allows data to be transferred successfully XON XOFF is also called software handshake hard copy A printed or otherwise permanent copy of data from a processing system hard disk 1 A magnetic disk consisting of a rigid aluminum substrate coated or plated usually on both sides with a magnetic material 2 A disk permanently mounted in its drive highlighting A way of making a portion of a do
204. l Page Break Format Border Font Add Row Page Break Ctrl Enter Number Remove Page Break Ctrl M Alignment Save Sheet As Page Setup Cell References Advanced Copy Set Print Area Delete Sheet Print Area Rename Sheet Print Setup Properties Print Process Setup Help Function Number Help Contents Graph About Organize Multipoint Blank Subtraction Precalculation Kinetic Processors Ratio Inhibition Curve Fit Cut Off 3 6 View Desktop Bar Status Bar Tool Bar Tabs Bar On Top Hide Show Sheets Arrange Sheets Zoom In Zoom Out Procedure Results Sheet New Sheet Open Sheet Save Sheet Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 2 Session See the Procedure Desktop for more details 3 2 2 1 New New Session menu or Use this command to create a new session and specify the name of the session 3 2 2 2 Open Open Session menu or 5 Use this command to open an existing session 3 2 2 3 Save Save Session menu or Use this command to save the session 3 2 2 4 Save As Save As Session menu Use this command to save the session with a new name 3 2 2 5 Print Print Session menu or Use this command to get a printout of the session Ascent Software User s Guide 3 7 3 2 2 6 Last five sessions The last five sessions can be quickly opened from the list 3 2 2 7 Exit Exit Session menu Use this comm
205. licates and specific blanks Clear all Removes the specification of all the wells on the plate For more information see Layout in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 8 Template The user can create and modify up to a 100 different plate templates select Setup Plate templates Modify The plate template list is configured by defining the default template and enabling disabling templates The distance between measurement points in the well area is 1 5 mm and there is always one point located in the middle of the well area The number of additional measurement points inside the well area depends on the well bottom area 1 36 Ascent Software User s Guide Template Parameters Labsystems CLINIPLATE OD The following plate templates are defined in the template list e Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Plate e Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Strip Plate e Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate e Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate w adapter e Thermo Labsystems Microlite 96 Plate e Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE e Thermo Labsystems COMBIPLATE in Multiframe e Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE 384 e Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE 384 with adapter e Dynex 96 well Microlite plates e 96 Wells GENERIC e 96 Wells CORNING 25860 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 37 96 Wells COSTAR 3596 96 Wells NUNC N 167008 96 Wells FALCON 3072 96 Wells FALCON 3075 96 Wells GREINER 655180 96 Wells IWAKI 3860
206. lized All other alphabetic characters are lowercase Numbers are not changed by the PROPER 4 50 Ascent Software User s Guide See Also LOWER and UPPER functions Examples PROPER 3rd Control returns 3Rd Control PROPER PROLIFERATION INDEX returns Proliferation Index 4 2 2 74 RAND Description Returns a number selected randomly from a uniform distribution greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1 Syntax RAND Remarks Although the RAND does not use arguments you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function Examples RAND 10 returns a random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 10 4 2 2 75 REPLACE Description Replaces part of a text string with another text string Syntax REPLACE orig_text start_position num chars repl text The orig text is the original text string The start position is the character position where the replacement begins If the start position is greater than the number of characters in the or g text the rep text is appended to the end of the orig text If the start position is less than 1 the Z VALUE is returned Ascent Software User s Guide 4 51 See Also Examples 4 2 2 76 REPT Description Syntax Remarks Examples 4 52 The num_chars is the number of characters one wishes to replace If this argument is negative the VALUE is returned The rep text is the replacement text string MID
207. ly that the filter is missing This error is reported if this missing filter is selected After the lag time has expired the lamp is not yet ready for measurement This may occur if the lamp was off and a Measure command is executed before the lamp has been on for 5 seconds The lag time must also be nonzero but less or equal to 5 seconds for this warning to appear The measurement will not start until the lamp has been on for 5 seconds The selected typed filter is not available The type of plate is too high for this instrument Actions If the filter is not missing and the error persists contact service Increase the lag time This error should never appear in the standalone mode Try another filter Change the type of plate Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Timer already expired Reason If a command to wait for a timer to expire WAI is executed and the timer has already expired this warning is returned This error may also be reported if the lag time is too short for the measuring head to move to the first measuring position Actions Use a longer lag or interval time 4 6 10 Fluoroskan Ascent including FL amp CF Luminoskan Ascent and Nepheloskan Ascent related Message Did not find a suitable reference chip Validate without a reference e instrument received an unknown command e The measurement interval is shorter than the integratio
208. m number of calibrators is 3 e bx for Cubic polynomial and the minimum number of calibrators is 4 e bx dx ex for Quartic polynomial and the minimum number of calibrators is 5 In the equations above y equals the measured signal and x equals the concentration a 5b c d and e are the coefficients specific to each degree of the fit function Coefficients of the functions are solved with the least squares algorithm using singular value decomposition SVD Roots of the polynomial i e the results are calculated with an iterative Laquerre s method If more than one root is found in the calibration area the method returns a warning You can also select a method that is commonly used by spreadsheet programs a straight forward linear least squares LLS method This method might produce slightly different values for the coefficients a and b but neither of these two methods SVD or LLS can be considered absolutely better than the other e bx for Linear Regression LLS and the minimum number of calibrators is 2 3 70 Ascent Software User s Guide Point to point The point to point method connects the adjacent response concentrations coordinates i e the calibration points together using a straight line y a bx different for each of the intervals The results are calculated by searching first the correct interval and then using the corresponding equation The mi
209. mber is the value to round The significance is the multiple to which to round Remarks Regardless of the sign of the number the value is rounded down towards zero If the number is exact multiple of the significance no rounding occurs If the number or significance is non numerical the ZNAME is returned When the arguments have opposite signs the ZNUM is returned See Also CEILING EVEN INT ODD ROUND and TRUNC functions Examples FLOOR 1 23459 05 returns 1 2 FLOOR 148 24 2 returns 148 4 2 2 35 HLOOKUP Description Searches the top row of a table for a value and returns the contents of a cell in the table that corresponds to the location of the search value Syntax HLOOKUP search item search range row index The search item is a value text string or reference to a cell containing a value that is matched against data in the top row of the 4 26 Ascent Software User s Guide search_range The search_range is a reference to the range table to be searched The cells in the first row of the search range contain numbers text or logical values The contents of the first row must be in ascending order e g 2 1 0 2 A through Z False True Text searches are not case sensitive The row_index is the row in the search range from which the matching value is returned The row index can be a number from 1 to the number of rows in the search range If the row index is less than 1 t
210. ment points defined the points within the well are measured using the same Moving type as defined for the wells e Execute by 1 n wells The Execute by 1 n wells setting defines the size of a group of wells As many wells as defined by this field are measured dispensed at a time The default group size is the number of wells on the plate which means that all the wells are measured dispensed in one pass of the session steps If the group size is less than the total number of wells on the plate the steps of the session are repeatedly run until all the selected wells are measured dispensed Suppose that you have a 96 well plate and have selected all the wells Setting Execute by 1 n wells to 8 means that the steps are repeated 12 times and 8 wells are measured in each pass 2 32 Ascent Software User s Guide For example when the user has defined the following session using moving type 5 The instrument will perform the following actions with different Execute by 1 n wells settings Ascent Software User s Guide 2 33 Execute by 1 n wells setting 1 well 8 wells 96 wells Dispense for well A1 Dispense for wells A1 H1 Dispense for wells A1 H12 Measure for well A1 Measure for wells 1 1 Measure for vafis A1 H12 Dispense Tor well A1 Dispense2 for wells A1 H1 Dispense2 1 12 2 for well A1 Measure2 for wells A1 H1 Measure2 for a A1 H12 y Dispense1 for well B1 Di
211. meter During measurement the signal level is checked when the light path is blocked If the level is too high this error is reported The instrument was unable to detect the edges of the air blank hole and thus could not adjust the offsets One of the parameters in a shake command is not within the allowed limits Actions Check that the serial cable is properly connected This error may be reported if the serial cable is connected while the instrument is on Check that the instrument cover is properly closed Check that the measuring chamber lid is closed Contact service if the error persists This error may be reported after the OFF command which is not used during normal operation Leave the use of the OFF command to a service person This error should never appear if the instrument is used in the standalone mode or through the Ascent PC software Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e The required measuring head position is out of range e Plate X stepper out of position tolerance e Plate X stepper timeout e Measuring head Y stepper out of position tolerance e Measuring head Y stepper timeout e Filter wheel position error e Filter wheel timeout e Measuring head XP stepper out of position tolerance e Measuring head XP stepper timeout Ascent Software User s Guide Reason This may occur if all the points of the array to be measured are not wi
212. mount of time elapsed time or processor time used in executing a program is called the execution time or sometimes the run time save In many applications the File menu contains two commands for saving files Save and Save As You use the Save command to save changes to an existing file You use the Save As command to name and save a new file or to save an existing file under a new name In brief to write data typically a file to a storage medium such as a disk or tape 4 146 Ascent Software User s Guide scroll To move the information displayed on a screen in a vertical or horizontal direction as information disappears at one edge new information becomes visible at the other edge or alternatively space is provided for the entry of new data The scrolling action is perceived as a smooth movement In some displays the movement is in discrete increments of one line pitch and this is referred to as racking Scrolling is technically more difficult to achieve but eases simultaneous reading scroll box In a scroll bar the small box that shows the position of information currently in the window or list box relative to the contents of the entire window select 1 To initiate an action or enable a data path 2 To mark out a section of a document before performing an operation on it such as copy move or cut or before changing its attributes such as font color margins or line spacing The selection pro
213. mp RFU returns the Results RFU because the character returned by CHAR 8 is non printable Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 16 CODE Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Returns a numeric code representing the first character of the supplied string CODE text The text is any string The numeric code and associated string are defined in your computer s character set The character set used by Windows is the ANSI character set CHAR function CODE A returns 65 CODE b returns 98 4 2 2 17 COLUMN Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 16 Returns the column number of the supplied reference COLUMN reference The reference is a reference to a cell or range Omitting the argument returns the number of the column in which the COLUMN is placed COLUMNS and ROW functions COLUMN B3 returns 2 COLUMN returns 4 if the function is entered in cell D2 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 18 COLUMNS Description Returns the number of columns in a range reference Syntax COLUMNS range The range is a reference a range of cells See Also COLUMN and ROWS functions Examples COLUMNS A1 D5 returns 4 4 2 2 19 COS Description Returns the cosine of a number Syntax COS number The number is any number See Also ACOS ASINH ATANH COSH and PI functions Examples COS 1 444 returns 126 COS 5 returns 28 4 2 2 20 COSH Description Returns
214. mple32 40 Sample48 SampleS Sample64 Sample 2 Sample80 Sample88 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 23 The well data contains the type and name of the item in the well The calibrator well data also contains the concentration of the item The sample well data contains the dilution of the sample A The Layout Editor contains the following buttons and fields Type Dilution Fill Clear Name Blank Assay Clear Paste 2 24 Type The type of well is either CALIBR CONTROL SAMPLE or BLANK The type can be changed only when the selected well is empty The colors of the well borders are the same as the defined colors for the different well types i e calibrators controls samples and blanks The borders of empty wells are black The colors of the different well types can be defined on the Procedure Desktop through Setup Colors Name The name of the item The name Blank is allowed only with the type BLANK The maximum length of the name is generally 50 characters with the exception of the type BLANK Ascent Software automatically numbers different items concentrations and dilutions in series This number is added as an extension to the name given by the user The numbering of the samples in the dilution series has a space a running number a slash and a ru
215. n time than 65535 measurements per point requested Ascent Software User s Guide Reason When validating a filter pair none of the reference chips on the plate carrier gave an acceptable signal level The command was not recognized by the instrument The time needed for doing a single measurement is longer than the requested interval time between measurements The measurement parameters of the instrument would result in more than 65535 results per measurement point Actions If a slight decrease in the precision of the results is acceptable you can validate the pair without a reference chip If this error is reported repeatedly contact service Increase the interval time or decrease the integration time so that the interval time is longer than the integration time Contact service Continued 4 107 Message e Cannot shake with the given shake parameters e Plate position undefined e Plate X Y stepper out of position tolerance e Plate X Y stepper timeout e Emission filter out of position tolerance e Emission filter timeout e Excitation filter out of position tolerance Excitation filter timeout e Filter pair not validated 4 108 Reason The combination of the shaking parameters results in too high a radial acceleration Attempt to shake the plate when the plate is out The actual and the expected plate positions differ too much a
216. n entire population of values The standard deviation of a population represents an average of deviations from the population mean within a list of values Syntax STDEVP number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers See Also STDEV VAR and VARP functions Examples STDEVP 4 0 3 0 3 0 SUP 25 545 4 0 3 5 returns 52 4 2 2 89 SUBSTITUTE Description Replaces a specified part of a text string with another text string Syntax SUBSTITUTE text text new text n stance The text is a text string that contains the text one wishes to replace You can also specify a reference to a cell that contains text The text is the text string to be replaced The new text is the replacement text The nstance specifies the occurrence of the old text one wishes to replace If this argument is omitted every instance of the old text is replaced See Also REPLACE and TRIM functions Ascent Software User s Guide 4 59 Examples 4 2 2 90 SUM Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 60 SUBSTITUTE User Name Customer Customer John Doe returns User Name John Doe SUBSTITUTE Blank T Control IU 1 2 2 returns Blank 1 Control 2 Returns the sum of the supplied numbers SUM number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated
217. n is enabled only when Session autosave is ticked Note is useful to create and use a directory for each respective 2 78 Session that uses the Automatic session name generation Automatic runtime Curves The runtime Curves dialog appears automatically when this check box is checked with the measurement types Kinetic Dual kinetic and Monitor The curves also disappear automatically after the run Leave plate in Leaves the plate in the instrument after a run Keep dispenser syringe full Aspirates the dispenser syringe full after priming and whenever the syringe needs filling always to full volume Without this check box selected only the volume needed for the completion of the assay will be aspirated Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 8 Help You can launch the Help application by selecting Help Help Contents from the main menu The following Help window will appear E Fluoroskan Help Ge amp Hide Back Forward Print nix Contents Index Search Glossary 2 Fluoroskan Ascent 2 Introduction 2 Product Support Setting up the system T b Basic concepts Inside the help you can often navigate using the images Click on an area in the image that changes Making applications the cursor into a hand Procedure Desktop menus Standard sheets Click for quick access to some of the help topics Basic operations gt Results Desktop menus Setting up the system References
218. n own application is easy In the special graphical Procedure Desktop you can simply drag the assay steps from the toolbox into the Steplist You can define measurement shaking dispensing and incubation parameters On the Results Desktop you can define spreadsheets to perform calculations and to create impressive reports All the application data can be recalled executed and saved with a click of the mouse Ascent Software User s Guide 1 1 Ascent Software provides 1 2 Full support for both fluorometric and luminometric measurements FL only A template database for the most common 1 to 384 well plates A template editor for the user to define plate templates A variety of options to select measurement points in a well A drag and drop technique to define the procedure steps to the Steplist Simultaneous measuring and dispensing A flexible spreadsheet type environment for calculations and reports A session management system Runtime Screens during execution Graph functions to generate graphical presentation of data A Function tool to easily create custom made formulas A Curve Fit tool to create calibrator curves and to calculate sample concentrations A Cut Off tool to create various cut off sheets Kinetic processors Ascent Software User s Guide 1 2 Product support For any questions about Ascent Software contact your local Thermo Labsystems distributor When you contact the distributor be
219. n that is running but is not active The application cannot receive user input background noise The noise inherent in a line or circuit independent of the presence of a signal backup A resource that is or can be used as a substitute when a primary resource fails or when a file has been corrupted The word is also used as a verb to back up i e to make a copy in anticipation of future failure or corruption Ascent Software User s Guide 4 129 bandwidth 1 For bandpass filters it is the full width of the pass band measured at one half the peak transmittance expressed in nanometers and microns 2 Range of frequencies 3 Measure of the amount of data that can be transmitted along a cable or channel or other medium 4 Measure of the range of frequencies that a monitor or CRT will accept and display baud rate The number of times per second that a system especially a data transmission channel changes state In the particular case of a binary channel the baud rate is equal to the bit rate i e 1 baud is 1 bit per second For a general channel 1 baud is 1 digit per second 1 baud is 1 symbol per second or whatever the states of the system represent bit binary digit 1 Either of the two digits 0 and 1 in the binary number system 2 The fundamental unit of information used in information theory It is the quantity of information required to distinguish between a pair of equiprobable events
220. ndard deviation 5 45 PMT gain factor 0 714 Gain adjust factor for gain 1 1039 28 Gain adjust factor for gain 10 102 518 Gain adjust factor for gain 100 10 1323 Gain adjust factor for gain 1000 1 Lamp set voltage 10 0 V Ascent Software User s Guide 2 73 2 74 Heating elements Ceiling temperature C Ceiling offset C Ceiling slope C C Ceiling slope start C Bottom temperature C Bottom offset C Bottom slope C C Bottom slope start C Filter pair data Excitation filter position Excitation filter wavelength Emission filter position Emission filter wavelength Calibration chip Validation signal of max Validation background of max Calibration factor Normal beam scaling factor Small beam scaling factor 23 8 1 20 0 10 37 00 23 6 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 355 1 460 3 2 24 0 01 1 00227 1 1 Date and time of validation 13 2 2002 16 08 44 Reference channel gain PMT voltage Excitation filter position Excitation filter wavelength Emission filter position Emission filter wavelength Calibration chip Validation signal of max Validation background of max Calibration factor Normal beam scaling factor Small beam scaling factor 47 63 550 2 485 2 518 3 33 90 0 00 1 02704 1 1 Date and time of validation 13 2 2002 16 09 21 Reference channel gain PMT voltage Excitation filter position 7 66 423 2 Ascent S
221. ng in an unsatisfactory field Try to rewrite the input correctly Usually the cursor is flashing in an unsatisfactory field Try to use another password Try again Try to rewrite the input correctly Usually the cursor is flashing in an unsatisfactory field Try to rewrite the input correctly Usually the cursor is flashing in an unsatisfactory field Actions Remove the Step or change the target temperature Change the name of either step Add steps for example a Measure step to the Steplist Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Invalid sheet name Check that the lowercase and uppercase characters are correct The Load step failed Check that the filename and path are correct e No area definition in step e Save step failed Check that the sheet name is correct e Step name STEPNAME already used in Results Reason The sheet name described in the Save Load step was not found The filename described in the Save Load step was not found The measurement area is not defined The sheet name described in the Save Load step was not found An identical name was found 4 6 7 Miscellaneous Message e input does not conform to a picture e instrument operation was aborted e Unlisted error NUMBER e Unlisted warning NUMBER Reason The user input is not correct for this field The user has
222. nimum number of calibrators for this fit type is 2 Cubic spline This method is a smoothed point to point method where the adjacent calibration points are connected together using cubic polynomials y a bx cx dx and optimizing the connecting points as smoothly as possible to avoid sharp angles The results are calculated by searching first the correct interval and then using a bi section method to find the answer from the corresponding equation The minimum number of calibrators for this fit type is 2 Sigmoid logistic Log Logit and Four parameter logistic functions All the three fit function methods use the same fit model a b y pa 225 1 In the equation above y is the signal x the concentration a the maximum signal asymptote above b the minimum signal asymptote below c the concentration at inflection point and d a slope related term at the inflection point The difference between these three models is that they solve coefficients of the equation above differently The minimum number of calibrators for these fit types is 4 e Sigmoid logistic The coefficients of the function are solved using the Levenberg Marguardt method e Four parameter logistic The coefficients of the function are solved with the least squares algorithm using singular value decomposition SVD Ascent Software User s Guide 3 71 e Log Logit The and b coefficients are treated as known otherwise it is the same as the
223. nning dilution number The user can give a name maximum 50 characters for the type SAMPLE Depending on the characters used the whole name should be visible in the well data if the length of the name is 9 to 10 characters or less in layout and 9 characters in cell including running number and dilution Otherwise the whole name is only displayed in the Name field and the first 9 to 10 characters are displayed in the well Concentration Dilution 1 The concentration of the calibrator or the dilution of the sample This data can only be edited when the type is CALIBR or SAMPLE Ascent Software User s Guide e Assay The name of the assay You can enter an assay name by editing the field or selecting the assay from the drop down list The name of the assay is required when you have several assays on the same plate The maximum length of the name is 20 characters Only 10 characters can be displayed in the Assay list e Apply Applies the data from the fields to the well e Clear Removes the data from the fields of the selected well s and their replicates and specific blanks Ta e Open Opens the list of layout files The layout can be selected to the editor from the list You can open files with the lay and pla extensions The lay file is a layout file that is automatically generated by Ascent Software whenever a whole session is saved The lay file always has the same name as the corresponding session file The pla f
224. ntally or both e Print Options Grid Lines If selected prints horizontal and vertical cell grid lines in worksheets Black amp White Prints drawing objects in black and white Anything in the foreground that is not entirely white is printed as black Anything in the background that is not entirely black is printed as white If you formatted your data with colors but print on a black and white printer select this option If you use a color printer but want faster printing selecting this option may reduce the printing time Row and Column Headings Prints row numbers and column letters in the A1 reference style or numbered rows and columns in the R1C1 reference style Ascent Software User s Guide 2 71 e Scale Reduces the step or selection during printing to fit the specified number of pages Fit To Pages In most cases it is worthwhile to select this option to save paper Pages Wide You can change the figure of pages wide This figure does not normally have to be changed The default figure is 19 Pages wide can range from 1 to 100 Pages High You can change the figure of pages high This figure does not normally have to be changed The default figure is 1 Pages high can range from 1 to 100 Note Pages Wide and Pages High are used together with Fit 70 Pages to define how many papers can maximum be used when you scale the data to the page s If the data requires width but not height then Pages Wide 19 and Page
225. o Examples Returns the sine of the supplied angle SIN number The number is the angle expressed in radians If the angle is expressed in degrees convert the angle to radians by multiplying the angle by PI 180 ASIN and PI functions SIN 45 returns 85 SIN 90 returns 89 Returns the hyperbolic sine of the specified number SINH number The number is any number ASINH and PI functions 1 returns 1 18 SINH 3 returns 10 02 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 57 4 2 2 86 SORT Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the square root of the specified number SORT number The number is any positive number If you specify a negative number the NUM is returned SUMSO function SORT 9 returns SORT 2 5 returns 1 58 4 2 2 87 STDEV Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 58 Returns the standard deviation of a population based on a sample of supplied values The standard deviation of a population represents an average of deviations from the population mean within a list of values STDEV number list The number list is a list of as many as 30 numbers separated by commas The list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers STDEVP VAR and VARP functions STDEV 4 0 3 0 3 0 3 5 2 5 4 0 3 5 returns 56 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 88 STDEVP Description Returns the standard deviation of a population based on a
226. o Labsystems Microtiter 96 Plate Modify Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 96 Strip Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate Thermo Labsystems Microtiter 384 Plate w adapter Duplicate Thermo Labsystems Microlite 96 Plate Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE Delete Thermo Labsystems COMBIPLATE in Multiframe Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE 384 Thermo Labsystems CLINIPLATE 384 with adapter Dynex 96 well Microlite plates 96 Wells GENERIC Show plate 96 Wells CORNING 25860 96 Wells COSTAR 3596 96 Wells NUNC N 167008 96 Wells FALCON 3072 96 Wells FALCON 3075 96 Wells GREINER 655180 96 Wells IWAKI 3860 096 384 Wells GENETIX Set as default SOON A CO Ng When Plate Templates is selected the list box shown contains all the plate templates found in the TEMPLATE CNF file New plate templates or modifications in the list are saved in the TEMPLATE CNF file when the dialog is closed using the OK button If the dialog is closed using the Cancel button no changes are saved In the list box items marked with Enab ed are enabled those marked with Disabled are disabled and the one that is marked with Default is the default definition The operation buttons are Modify You can start to modify the selected template e Duplicate Makes a copy of a currently selected template The user can modify the copy and save it with a new name e Delete Deletes the currently selected template Ascent Software User s Guide 1 49
227. oftware User s Guide Excitation filter wavelength Emission filter position Emission filter wavelength Calibration chip Validation signal of max Validation background of max Calibration factor Normal beam scaling factor Small beam scaling factor Date and time of validation Reference channel gain PMT voltage Excitation filter position Excitation filter wavelength Emission filter position Emission filter wavelength Calibration chip Validation signal of max Validation background of max Calibration factor Normal beam scaling factor Small beam scaling factor Date and time of validation Reference channel gain PMT voltage Excitation filter position Excitation filter wavelength Emission filter position Emission filter wavelength Calibration chip Validation signal of max Validation background of max Calibration factor Normal beam scaling factor Small beam scaling factor Date and time of validation Reference channel gain PMT voltage Ascent Software User s Guide 485 3 538 4 35 64 0 00 1 02316 0 338 0 372 13 2 2002 16 09 38 7 66 433 3 544 4 590 4 48 69 0 00 1 01719 1 1 13 2 2002 16 09 57 4 04 442 4 584 5 612 4 12 84 0 00 1 02343 1 1 13 2 2002 16 10 16 3 89 456 2 75 2 76 Luminometric status Default PMT voltage Filter data Filter position Filter wavelength Scaling factor
228. oint represent the date The numbers to the right of the decimal point represent the time The result of this function changes only when a recalculation of the worksheet occurs See Also DATE DAY HOUR MINUTE MONTH SECOND TODAY WEEKDAY and YEAR functions 4 46 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 68 ODD Description Syntax See Also Examples Rounds the specified number up to the nearest odd integer ODD number The number is any number a formula that evaluates to a number or a reference to a cell that contains a number CEILING EVEN FLOOR INT ROUND and TRUNC functions ODD 3 5 returns 5 ODD 6 returns 7 4 2 2 69 OFFSET Description Syntax Returns the contents of a range that is offset from a starting point on the spreadsheet OFFSET reference rows columns height width The reference is a reference to a cell on which the offset reference is based If you specify a range reference the VALUE is returned The rows is the number of rows of the reference that represents the upper left cell of the offset range A positive number represents rows below the starting cell A negative number represents rows above the starting cell If the rows places the upper left cell of the offset range outside the spreadsheet boundary the REF is returned The co umns is the number of columns of the reference that represents the upper left cell of the offset range A positive number represent
229. om tet en rtc perna 1 49 3 52 3 83 4 133 Chart backdrop EAE 4 80 4 83 iei Rede e ees 4 73 4 79 elementari teret seri ont XE Ra cna 4 74 4 78 4 80 4 83 4 84 ul EE 4 82 aa e rea ou d 4 72 terminology 4 72 PC 4 78 type 4 72 4 73 4 74 4 77 4 80 4 84 Charts tisse i Er 4 74 4 75 MEE 4 74 4 77 b bble 4 76 COMDIN ATION wees 4 75 Cem 4 77 a a 4 77 VI 4 75 pie and doughnLt cette ia ee eG 4 75 PE 4 76 eim ERE 4 75 SI iL rm M ee LR 4 75 o bu m d c E a 4 76 Clear all button eee 1 33 1 36 2 25 2 28 2 30 2 31 Close button 1 35 2 9 2 13 2 28 2 30 2 31 3 42 4 96 4 118 Command ABOR qe 4 87 CONTINUE iier eere er RE ox er OR 4 87 4 90 4 92 ED 4 85 formatan m ne turbae ote dte 4 94 INSTRUMENT 5 4 87
230. om the loaded file Case sensitive if saving data The Sheet name must be written exactly as it was on the Results Desktop Append If the Append check box is selected the sheet will be saved to the end of the file after all the previous data In this way many sheets can be saved in the same file The extension txt is the only extension allowed for the Append file format Note many cases it is advisable to create a new sheet Results Sheet New to obtain the Append file in the desired format Autoname file This check box is only enabled when the Save sheet is selected The directory path is given and the name of the file is generated from the current date and time The name format is MMddhhmm where MM is the month dd the day hh the hours and mm the minutes Note Append and Autoname file cannot be on at the same time File name Directory path The name of the file that the sheet is loaded from or saved in An extension is not required but if given it must match the selected file format The filename should be written here exactly the same as the actual filename on the disk The directory path is given when Autoname file is ticked Browse The file or the directory path can be selected from the file or directory list File format You can select the File format from three alternative choices Default Excel 4 0 and ASCII text Default is the natural format for the Ascent sheets The filename extension is VT
231. omment fields on the Results Desktop by typing Steps Pause1_Plate_ID into a cell Message The message displayed to the user when the Pause step is executed Waiting time hh mm ss The Waiting time allows the user to perform tasks while the plate is out between measurements After the given time the execution of the session continues The execution of the steps continues automatically after a given Waiting time Run plate out Runs the plate out if this check box is selected when the Pause step is executed This check box option is useful e g when manual addition of liquids is required First tick the check box to enable to send out the microplate between the two measurements Then set the time between the measurements in the Waiting time field Note Especially in some instances where it might be difficult to 2 52 estimate the Waiting time correctly set the Waiting time to zero and manually control the Pause step execution by pressing the Continue button see next page when desired Alarm Issues an alarm if this check box is selected when the Pause step is executed Options This window is used e g when communication between two programs or systems is necessary or waiting for a string from a barcode reader When the Options button is pressed Ascent Software User s Guide Pause Options De 2 d Serial port settings Handshake None Le Wait Plate ID string if Parity None _
232. oncentration Dilution 1 The concentration of the calibrator or the dilution of the sample Assay The name of the assay The name of the assay is required when you have several assays on the same plate Filling order Select the filling order of the item and the calibration dilution series Replicates The number of replicates of the item Specific blanks The calibrator control or sample can have none one or two specific blank s Fill replicates and blanks The filling order of the replicates and blanks Number of samples controls Key in the number of samples or controls when samples and controls are edited The names of samples and controls are generated automatically by adding a number to the name Generate concentration dilution series Tick this check box when you want to generate calibration or dilution series No of calibrators dilutions Key in the number of calibrators or sample dilutions in the series The names of the calibrators are generated automatically by adding a running number to the name Calibrators and sample dilutions are generated automatically Operators Multiply Divide Add Subtract The operators used in the calculation of concentrations in calibration series and in the calculation of dilutions in sample dilution series By The value used in the calculation of concentrations in calibration series and in the calculation of dilutions in sample dilution series Ascent Software
233. or is faulty The detected track stepper home position did not match the calculated position The track stepper is not rotating properly or the drive belt slips A command was received which referenced a strip outside the range 1 12 Onset of shake in a mode not supported was requested A shake speed outside the range 300 1500 rpm was requested The well reference in a command was outside the range 1 96 A temperature outside the range 14 40 C was requested The reader cover is not closed during measurement Actions Check that the plate carriage moves freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Check that the plate carriage moves freely when the instrument power is off If the error persists contact service Contact service Contact service Contact service Contact service Contact service Close the green instrument cover A faint click from a microswitch should be audible when the cover is closed If the error persists contact service Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Too much lag in track e Chopper drum not properly aligned e high temperature measurement electronics offset e Dispenser pump position error Reason The position difference between detecting the home position of track when traveling in opposite directions is too high There is probably a slack in the track drive belt The p
234. ort the Ascent Software User s Guide See Also Examples 4 2 2 5 AND Description Syntax See Also Examples R1C1 reference format The sheet is the name of an external spreadsheet Omitting this argument assumes that the reference exists on the current spreadsheet COLUMN OFFSET and ROW functions ADDRESS 5 6 1 returns F 5 ADDRESS 5 6 2 TRUE STEPS VTS returns STEPS VTS F5 Returns True if all arguments are true Returns False if at least one argument is false AND ogical list The ogical list is a list of conditions separated by commas You can include as many as 30 conditions in the list The list can contain logical values or a reference to a range containing logical values Text and empty cells are ignored If there are no logical values on the list the VALUE is returned IF NOT and OR functions AND 1 1 2 545 10 returns True because both arguments are true AND TRUE FALSE returns False Ascent Software User s Guide 4 9 4 2 2 6 ASIN Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Returns the arcsine of a number ASIN number The number is the sine of the resulting angle ranging from 1 to 1 The resulting angle is returned in radians ranging from 2 7 2 ASINH PI and SIN functions ASIN 1 returns 1 57 ASIN 4 returns 41 4 2 2 7 ASINH Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 10 Returns the inverse hyperbolic
235. ositioning of the microplate is not accurate enough to guarantee correct measurement results The chopper drum is not adequately aligned with the optics assembly The measurement results may be incorrect if this error is reported The temperature measuring system is calibrated at startup If the calibration correction is too big this error is reported The detected dispenser pump home position did not match the calculated position The pump is not rotating properly Ascent Software User s Guide Actions Check that the plate carriage is securely clamped to the drive belt Tighten the track belt by moving the drive wheel closest to the front of the instrument towards the front But not too tight If the error persists contact service Contact service Contact service Check that the pump rotor rotates freely when the instrument power is off and the tubing is in rest position If the error persists contact service Continued 4 119 Message e Dispenser pump timeout e Position error of dispenser tips e Timeout of dispenser tips e Invalid dispensing volume e Invalid strip number for dispensing e Invalid dispenser temperature value e Internal timeout of reader while dispensing e The reader reported an error while dispensing 4 120 Reason The dispenser pump home position was not detected within the allowed time Either the pump is not rotating or the position s
236. our is number from 0 to 23 The minute is a number from 0 to 59 The second is a number from 0 to 59 HOUR MINUTE NOW SECOND TIMEVALUE functions TIME 12 26 24 returns 52 TIME 1 43 34 returns 07 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 63 4 2 2 97 TIMEVALUE Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns a serial number for the supplied text representation of time TIMEVALUE tex The text is a time in text format HOUR MINUTE NOW SECOND and TIME functions TIMEVALUE 1 43 43 am returns 07 TIMEVALUE 14 10 07 returns 59 4 2 2 98 TODAY Description Syntax Remarks See Also 4 64 Returns the current date as a serial number TODAY This function is updated only when the worksheet is recalculated DATE DAY and NOW functions Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 99 TRIM Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Removes all the spaces from the text except single spaces between words TRIM text The text is any text string or a reference to a cell that contains a text string Text that is imported from another environment may require this function CLEAN MID REPLACE and SUBSTITUTE functions TRIM Sample 1 Sample 2 returns Sample 1 Sample 2 4 2 2 100 TRUE Description Syntax See Also Returns the logical value True This function always requires the trailing parentheses TRUE FALSE function 4 2 2 101 TRUNC
237. ows or cells are shifted to accommodate the insertion Shortcut Ctrl 4l 3 2 3 7 Remove Remove Edit menu The Remove command completely removes selected cells rows or columns from a worksheet The surrounding cells shift to fill the space Shortcut Ctrl Note The Insert and Remove commands should be used with care since their use might interfere with formulas or graphs 3 10 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 3 8 Cell Names Cell Names Edit menu Use this command to edit names Define Name Cancel Add dii e Name Creates a name for a cell range constant or computed value You can then use this name to refer to the cell range or value Names make formulas easier to read understand and maintain You can add or delete names that have been defined previously e Formula You can define constant or computed values you intend to use later Shortcut Ctrl E Ascent Software User s Guide 3 11 3 2 3 9 Find and Replace Find and Replace Edit menu Searches a selected area or the entire whole worksheet for specified characters selects the first cell containing these characters and replaces them Find and Replace Current Cell Data Replace All gt Selected Area A lt Whole Sheet v Prompt on Replace Use The operation buttons are e Find What Specifies what to search for e Replace Identifies the characters that will replace the characters searched
238. p sef Eyfpd_sef Picogred sef Picogree sef Cancel Network List Files of Drives Session Files SEF File Name Type a new filename to save a Session with a different name Use the current name or select a name from the list to save a Session with an existing filename Note Note Ascent Software User s Guide e DO NOT use any file or directory names more than eight characters long Ascent Software does not support long file or directory names e DO NOT use any nonstandard characters in Ascent Software e DO NOT use a dot character in the directory name The dot character is reserved for the extension A filename can contain up to eight characters and an extension of up to three characters The program adds the extension you specify in the List Files of Type drop down list box List Files of Type Lets you select the file types you want displayed With regard to Sessions files can be saved only with the fixed sef Fluoroskan Ascent and Fluoroskan Ascent CF or sec Fluoroskan Ascent FL extension 2 7 e Directories Select the directory in which you want to store the Session e Drives Select the drive in which you want to store the Session e Network Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network 2 1 2 5 Print Print Session menu The Print comman
239. per inch CPI In general slower impact printers produce higher quality print but the highest quality is available from laser printers 4 144 Ascent Software User s Guide program file A file containing one or more programs or program fragments in source code or object code form prompt A change to the contents of a computer display to indicate that input is required from the operator protocol An agreement that governs the procedures used to exchange information between cooperating entities More specifically a protocol is such an agreement operating between entities that have no direct means of exchanging information but that do so by passing information across a local interface to so called lower level protocols until the lowest physical level is reached In general a protocol will govern the format of messages the generation of checking information and the flow control as well as actions to be taken in the event of errors pull down menu A menu that is pulled down from the menu bar and that remains available as long as the user holds it open Compare drop down menu push button A general term for the buttons on the menu bar the scroll bars the toolbars in the dialog boxes etc e g Option buttons Command buttons that are normally equipped with a title or picture and cause an action when pressed RAM Acronym for Random Access Memory usually the main impermanent memory o
240. pt Lists the available scripts set of letters Select a script from the drop down list Ascent Software User s Guide 3 29 3 2 6 3 Number Number Format menu Use this command to determine how the information is displayed in the selected cells You can use one of the built in number formats or you can create your own custom formats Custom Format ome Cancel tt H H0_ Red 40 it 110 00 1t 1 10 00 it 0 00_ Red 10 00 Category All e Format Lists all available formats for a selected category In a new worksheet the default number format for all cells is the Genera format The selected format is displayed below the Format list box e Category Lists the categories into which the number formats grouped into When you select a category the built in and custom formats for that category are displayed in the Format list box 3 30 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 6 4 Alignment Alignment Format menu Aligns the contents of the selected cells Alignment e Horizontal General Aligns text to the left numbers to the right and centers logical and error values This is the default alignment Left Aligns the cell contents to the left Center Centers the cell contents Ascent Software User s Guide 3 31 Right Aligns the cell contents to the right Fill Repeats the contents of the selected cell until the cell is full If the blank cells to the right also
241. r Ascent Software versions file that contains all session layouts separate editable layout file file that contains all session sheets file that contains all session graphs text file in ASCII format file of the Results sheets Microsoft Excel 4 0 file Ascent Software User s Guide 4 8 Parts of the screen 4 8 1 General Ascent Software is a Windows program operated with menus notebook tabs and quick buttons The Ascent program is started from the icon which is created at the installation Caption Tab Tab Tab The Windows oriented drag and drop technique is used in the program This means that some copying and controlling functions are done by picking up icon elements with parameters and dropping them in appropriate positions on the screen Ascent Software User s Guide 4 123 4 8 2 Menu Bar The Menu Bar which is located below the title bar along the top of the desktop window contains textual selections to the functions of the user interface To view all the commands in a menu do one of the following e Click the menu name or e Press ALT n where n is the underlined letter in the menu name For example press ALT S to open the Session menu 4 8 3 Tool Bar The Tool Bar is displayed across the top of the desktop window below the menu bar It contains quick buttons to the main functions of the active desktop To hide or display the Tool Bar choose Tool Bar from the View menu ALT V T
242. r s Guide 3 45 3 2 8 2 Graph Graph Process menu Use this command to run the Graph tool 160 140 _ _ LING 1 eo TNN ot Wi INV 1 Note In the worksheet first select the data you want to plot including the cells containing any category or series of names that you want to use on the chart and select Graph from the menu Note lt is highly recommendable to collect the source data into a custom made sheet and to create the graphs in the new sheet You can edit the metafile object e g cut copy paste clear insert remove Double click the metafile object graph to generate an Edit window In the Edit Format Plot window you can customize your chart by clicking 3 46 Ascent Software User s Guide the right mouse button see the Reference part of the manual for more details When the data is updated the metafile object updates itself You can e g copy and paste the metafile object by using the right mouse button and selecting the operation outside the Graph Clicking the right mouse button inside the Graph borders produces a different pop up menu If you want to delete the metafile object first exit the Graph activate the metafile object and then select Clear from the pop up menu that appears after clicking the right mouse button Otherwise relevant values are cleared 3 2 8 3 Organize Organize Process menu Organizes the measurement resul
243. r so that it is a certain length 7runcate 1 To cut short 2 To give an approximate value to a number by reducing it to a certain number of digits user interface UI The means of communication between a human user and a computer system referring in particular to the use of input output devices with supporting software Examples include the graphical user interface GUI and command line interface CLI utility programs utilities The collection of programs that forms part of every computer system and provides a variety of generally useful functions including file searching file copying and deleting file directories sorting and debugging text preparation program cross referencing and various mathematical functions 4 152 Ascent Software User s Guide verification and validation V amp V A generic term for the complete range of checks that are performed on a system in order to increase confidence that the system is suitable for its intended purpose This range might include a rigorous set of functional tests performance testing reliability testing and so on in which case the term verification validation and testing VV amp T is more appropriate viewing The mapping of scenes defined in a world coordinate system to pictures seen from a particular view point possibly with culling of the original scene and clipping of the area viewed warping Distorting an image or texture to achi
244. rdinates Each series on the chart requires two columns of data in the data grid The first column holds the X coordinate and the second column the Y coordinate The column label in the first column in each series is used to identify the series in the legend Additionally any formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart Any formatting applied to the second column is ignored You can use markers or lines or both to draw the XY points 4 3 3 11 Polar charts Use polar charts to show cyclical trends The polar chart requires two columns in the data grid for each chart series the first column holds the distance from the center of the chart the radius and the second column contains the angle on the perimeter of the chart The column label in the first column in each series identifies the series in the legend Additionally any formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart Any formatting applied to the second column is ignored 4 3 3 12 Bubble charts Use bubble charts to show a visual comparison using three coordinates Each bubble requires three columns of data in the data grid The first column holds the X coordinate the second the Y coordinate and the third the bubble size All the coordinates on a bubble chart measure values Therefore the vertical Y axis and the horizontal X axis both show values The column label in the first column in each series identifies the
245. re used to separate different commands Parameters are separated using the lt SPACE gt character The end characters of lines are lt CR gt lt LF gt Example TEM 370 0 CR LF 4 94 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 5 4 Response format Response lines consist of the header part of the command 3 character response information line s the response end field and the status and end character of lines All commands are responded by sending a line which contains the header part of the command 3 character immediately when the execution of the command is started It is possible to send response information in more than one line Every line starts with the header part of the original command and ends with lt CR gt lt LF gt The fields of the response information string are separated using the SPACE character The last line of the response contains the header part of the original command end field characters END status characters and the end characters CR LF Some of the commands have wait features which define if the last response line is acquired after the command is executed or after the execution is started Example 1 Response to the TEM command with no errors status TEM lt CR gt lt LF gt TEM END 0 CR lt LF gt 4 5 5 Buffering The PC and the instrument are able to receive more than one command line at a time Receiver buffer overflows are handled using XON XOFF handshakin
246. recision is 0 the number is rounded to the nearest integer Ascent Software User s Guide 4 53 See Also CEILING FLOOR INT MOD and TRUNC functions Examples ROUND 123 456 2 returns 123 46 ROUND 9899 435 2 returns 9900 4 2 2 79 ROW Description Returns the row number of the supplied reference Syntax ROW reference The reference is a cell or a range reference Omitting this argument returns the row number of the cell in which the ROW is entered See Also COLUMN and ROWS function Examples ROW B3 returns 3 4 2 2 80 ROWS Description Returns the number of rows in a range reference Syntax ROWS range The range is a reference to a range of cells See Also COLUMNS and ROW functions Examples ROWS A1 D5 returns 5 ROWS C30 F35 returns 6 4 54 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 81 SEARCH Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Locates the position of the first character of a specified text string within another text string SEARCH search_text text start position The search text is the text one wishes to find The search string can contain wild card characters The available wild card characters are an asterisk which matches any sequence of characters and a question mark which matches any single character To search for an asterisk or a question mark include a tilde before the character The text is the text to be searched The start position is the
247. rement points on the plate The maximum number of points in the X direction is 75 and in the Y direction 49 The minimum distance between two single measurement points is 1 5 mm The floating menu appears by pressing the right mouse button in the Area definition window The command buttons are situated top left of the Area definition window Parameters Area definition Layout Settings QUOI QNID QOO Qe 290 IO 1920 CE CR After defining the tool select the area by painting the desired area Wells are added to or removed from the measurement area depending on the tool The points marked yellow are selected black ones are not Note To properly update the existing results sheets the area definition and the plate layout should match If there is a mismatch you might get extra results Ascent Software User s Guide 2 17 2 1 5 2 1 Point Point Area menu or Use this command to define any single points of the wells to be measured Parameters Area definition Layout Settings IG 2 18 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 2 2 Middle Point Middle Point Area menu or Use this command to define that the middle point of the well is to be measured Ej Parameters Area definition Layout Settings General Ascent Software User s
248. rement types are available e Single e Dual Kinetic e Dual kinetic e Scanning e Monitor Single measures each well once with the defined integral time This measurement type equals a basic end point measurement The Dual measurement type performs a double end point measurement with a defined interval time between the two measurements Each well is measured twice and the measurement can be performed with two different filter pairs filters In the Kinetic measurement type several measurements are taken from the selected wells using the defined interval time The Kinetic measurement type is used for the detection of kinetic reactions In the Kinetic measurement type any number of wells from 1 to 384 are measured continuously for a defined number of measurement points The Dual kinetic measurement type is a combination of the Dual and the Kinetic measurement types Two readings are taken several times from each measurement point using the defined interval time The Scanning measurement type is similar to Single except that the plates are read without stopping the plate movement The Monitor measurement type measures the point a defined number of times Monitor is intended for the detection of very fast kinetic signals where the total reaction time is less than about 20 s Ascent Software User s Guide 2 37 2 1 5 6 1 Single In the Single measurement type the selected wells are measured once A single measurement result is ta
249. returns 2nd Ascent Software User s Guide 4 35 4 2 2 51 LEN Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 52 LN Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples 4 36 Returns the number of characters in the supplied text string LEN text The text in any text string The spaces in the string are counted as characters EXACT and SEARCH functions LEN 3rd Control returns 11 LEN 1 3 returns 3 Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number LN number The number is any positive real number The LN is the inverse of the EXP function EXP LOG and LOG10 functions LN 12 18 returns 2 50 LN 20 09 returns 3 00 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 53 LOG Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base LOG number base The text is any positive real number The base is the base of the logarithm Omitting this argument assumes a base of 10 EXP LN and LOG10 functions LOG 1 returns O LOG 10 returns 1 4 2 2 54 LOG10 Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the base 10 logarithm of a number LOG10 number The number is any positive real number EXP LN and LOG functions LOG10 260 returns 2 41 LOG10 100 returns 2 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 37 4 2 2 55 LOOKUP Description Searches for a value in one range and returns the contents of the corresponding position
250. rolling You can insert control characters into the Send string and Wait string input fields by first entering Ctrl and then a character with the ASCII value 64 the ASCII value of the control character you want For example M is the carriage return CR and J is the line feed LF The last character in the Wait string input field should be unique for Wait string or the string will not be detected even if it has been received 2 1 5 12 Save Load Save Load Steps menu or Use this command to add Save Load step to the Steplist Parameters General Step name Save Load1 Measurel Load Save Append Autoname file File name C ASCENTS Browse File format SavelLoadi The parameters of the Save Load step are e Step name The name of the step Different Save Load steps do not require unique step names e Load Loads data from a file When the data is loaded it is created in a sheet on the Results Desktop 2 54 Ascent Software User s Guide Save Saves a sheet as a file When the sheet is saved it must exist on the Results Desktop The Steps sheet shows the filename of the saved sheet Note When the Measure sheet is saved txt and xls worksheet file formats it will contain hidden measurement times and plate layout information Sheet name Optional if loading data A sheet with the given name will be created on the Results Desktop that contains data fr
251. rometric method the scaling values can be set separately for normal and small beams Values of the scaling factors used in the measurement are automatically copied to the Measure sheet 2 64 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 6 3 Password Password Setup menu Use this command to specify a system password If a system password has been specfied Ascent Software cannot be started without entering the password The password length must be 5 10 characters long Setup Password Password l 1 Password in use Cancel To set a password 1 Select Setup Password 2 Enter a password 3 Tick Password in use 4 Click OK 5 Retype password and click OK To remove a password 1 Select Setup Password 2 Enter the password 3 Untick Password in use 4 Click OK Ascent Software User s Guide 2 65 2 1 6 4 Dispensers not CF Dispensers Setup menu Use this command to set the parameters for the dispensers Dispenser 1 gt 2 gt Default settings Dispenser position Default speed t Me CX Start speed Cutoff speed 100 Slope aT ERU Defaults Note The repriming of the dispensers needed e Dispenser Defines the dispenser 1 to 3 to set the parameters for e Dispenser position Defines the position of the dispenser 2 1 6 4 1 Default settings All values are a percentage of the maximum The maximum values represent differen
252. s text e g 12 False is returned ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISREF ISTEXT functions ISNUMBER 123 45 returns True ISNUMBER 123 returns False Determines if the specified expression is a range reference ISREF expression The expression is any expression If the expression returns a range reference True is returned Otherwise False is returned ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER and ISTEXT functions ISREF returns True Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 49 ISTEXT Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples 4 2 2 50 LEFT Description Syntax See Also Examples Determines if the specified expression is text ISTEXT expression The expression is any expression If the expression returns text True is returned Otherwise False is returned ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER and ISREF functions ISTEXT 2nd Blank returns True Returns the characters furthest left from the specified text string LEFT text num chars The text is any text string The num chars is the number of characters to return This value must be greater than or equal to zero If the num chars is greater than the number of characters in the text the entire string is returned Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1 MID and RIGHT functions LEFT 2nd Sample returns 2 LEFT 2nd Control 3
253. s the columns to the right of the starting cell A Ascent Software User s Guide 4 47 negative number represents the columns to the left of the starting cell If the co umns places the upper left cell of the offset range outside the spreadsheet boundary the REF is returned The height is a positive number representing the number of rows to include in the offset range Omitting this argument assumes a single row The width is a positive number representing the number of columns to include in the offset range Omitting this argument assumes a single column Remarks The OFFSET does not change the current selection on the worksheet Because it returns a reference the OFFSET can be used in any function that requires or uses a cell or range reference as an argument See Also COLUMN INDIRECT and ROW functions Examples OFFSET B1 3 2 1 1 returns the contents of cell D4 SUM OFFSET A1 2 4 3 2 equals the sum of the range E3 F5 4 48 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 70 OR Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 71 Pl Description Syntax Remarks See Also Returns True if at least one of a series of logical arguments is true OR l ogical list The ogical 1 51 is a list of conditions separated by commas You can include as many as 30 conditions in the list The list can contain logical values or a reference to a range containing logical values Text and empty cells are ignor
254. s 0 when the specified range contains empty cells Returns the serial number of the supplied date DATE year month day The year is a number ranging from 1900 to 2078 If the year is between 1920 and 2019 you can specify two digits to represent the year Otherwise specify all four digits The month is a number representing the month e g 12 represents December If a number greater than 12 is supplied the number is added to the first month of the specified year The day is a number representing the day of the month If the number you specify for the day exceeds the number of days in that particular month the number is added to the first day of the specified month DATEVALUE DAY MONTH NOW TIMEVALUE TODAY and YEAR functions DATE 94 6 21 returns 34506 DATE 99 3 6 returns 36225 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 19 4 2 2 24 DATEVALUE Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 25 DAY Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 20 Returns the serial number of a date supplied as a text string DATEVALUE ex The text is a date in text format between January 1 1900 and December 31 2078 If you omit the year the current year is used NOW TIMEVALUE and TODAY functions DATEVALUE 3 6 94 returns 34399 DATEVALUE 12 25 95 returns 35058 Returns the day of the month that corresponds to the date represented by the supplied number DAYi serial number The
255. s High 1 On the other hand if the data requires height but not width then Pages Wide 1 and Pages High 19 Scale Reduces or enlarges the selection to be printed You can reduce the selection to be printed to 10 of its normal size or enlarge it up to 400 The default value is 100 2 72 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 6 7 Instrument Status Instrument Status Setup menu Retrieves the Instrument Status report including the version serial number and a list of instrument data This function is enabled when the instrument is connected and is online The user can obtain valuable information from the Instrument Status report e g in problem situations By pressing the Save button you can store the Instrument Status report as a text file By pressing the Print button you can print the Instrument Status report The Print dialog is the same as the dialog in other print functions Example Instrument Status report Report created 26 2 2002 14 09 05 Instrument Fluoroskan Ascent FL 2 5 Serial number 374033609C Instrument capabilities Shaking Yes Incubating Yes Dispensers 1 Current beam Normal Plate X offset correction steps 2 Plate Y offset correction steps 1 Excitation stepper offset correction steps 0 Emission stepper offset correction steps 0 Temperature A D offset correction 10 to 24 C 2 Temperature A D offset correction 24 to 45 C 1 Measure A D offset correction 3 Background noise sta
256. s of stepping through a number of menus This usually involves pre empting the menus by typing in the selections before they appear menu driven program A program that obtains input from a user by displaying a list of options the menu from which the user indicates his her choice metafile A mechanism for storing and transmitting graphical information in a device independent way mode 1 A term used in many contexts concerning the operation and use of a computer system For example conversational mode refers to interactive computer use interpretive mode refers to a way of executing a language there are addressing modes in instruction descriptions 2 A measure of location compare mean median and mode noise Any signal that occurs in electronic or communication system and is considered extraneous to the desired signal Ascent Software User s Guide 4 141 notebook computer A computer about the size of a piece of A4 paper about 20 by 30 cm and a few cm thick with a hinge along the long side Notebooks can have all the processing power and features of desktop computers To increase their flexibility the pointing device is often a trackerball embedded in the keyboard rather than a mouse which requires a hard flat surface to operate successfully off line or offline Off Line Of peripheral devices or files not connected to the system or not usable A device may be physicall
257. scent Software User s Guide The following parameters for the General step are e Plate template The name of the selected microplate e g Labsystems Cliniplate e User name The user name is given by the user e Comment Further details or specifications about the session given by the user e Lock A session specific password can be added 2 1 5 1 1 Session lock To add a session specific password 1 Click the Lock button in the General Parameters tab Lock Session Password v Session lock enabled Cancel 2 Make sure that the Session lock enabled checkbox is ticked 3 Enter a password Click OK then retype password and click OK again The session is now locked the Lock button has now changed to Unlock Note The password remains even if the session is saved under a different name To unlock the session for editing 1 Click Unlock Ascent Software User s Guide 2 15 2 Type the password and click OK You may now edit the session Note DO NOT untick the Session lock enabled checkbox If yo do then the session lock is removed To remove lock 1 Click Unlock 2 Type the session password AND untick the Session lock enabled checkbox 3 Click OK the lock has now been removed 2 16 Ascent Software User s Guide 2 1 5 2 Area definition The Area functions allow the user to Point select or Remove deselect areas to be measured The area is a collection of measu
258. scent Software installed As default this will be installed into C Ascent You can change the path by using the Browse button A new directory can be created by typing in a new directory name Note e DO NOT use any directory names more than eight characters long Ascent Software does not support long directory names DO NOT use any nonstandard characters Ascent Software e DO NOT use a dot character in the directory name The dot character is reserved for the extension Ascent Software User s Guide 1 9 Choose Destination Location 1 10 Ascent Software User s Guide Typical A complete installation Compact No session files installed No help files installed Custom You may choose what components are installed program files help files and or session files The next dialog allows the selection or the addition of a program folder Select Program Folder NC Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing Folders list Click Next to continue Existing Folders Accessories Administrative Tools Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Java 2 Runtime Environment KingFisher Lotus Applications Microsoft Office Tools MSDE Ascent Software User s Guide 1 11 The installation is completed with the following dialog box Setup Complete Setup has finished installing Ascent Software on your computer
259. sented with the prefix If no increasing rate is found the result is 0 zero 3 58 Ascent Software User s Guide Decreasing Searches for the maximum decreasing rate The rate is presented with the prefix If no decreasing rate is found the result is 0 zero Kinetic rate s or Kinetic rate min The Kinetic rate is calculated per second or per minute Ignore first n readings Ignores a defined number of readings Starts from the first reading Ignore last n readings Ignores a defined number of readings Starts from the last reading Window 2 1000 The number of consecutive readings to use for evaluation The highest reaction rate for each well is calculated using a sliding window A window defines how many measurement points are included in the calculations When the measurement results are calculated the means are used The size of this window is given in the Window parameter box For example if the number of measurements is ten and the Window parameter is three the system will calculate the first rate using the measurements 1 to 3 the second rate using the measurements 2 to 4 and so on until all the measurement points have been handled The system will give the maximum value of the calculated rates e Time to maximum rate The time to maximum rate is calculated similarly to the maximum rate but the result is reported as the time in seconds from the first reading to the endpo
260. sheets the area definition and the plate layout should match If there is a mismatch you might get extra results Ascent Software User s Guide 1 31 1 5 7 The Layout function allows the user to specify the wells The plate is Layout displayed in the window Parameters Area definition Layout Settinas mpa d pun E te 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 10 BLANK ICALIBR mw ico Tere 1000 000 BLANK ICALIBR Blank cal 4 1000 000 CALIBR SAMPLE n 1 000 SAMPLE CALIBR F ca 2 2 10 000 mH mH 11 SAMPLE 15 The data fields are 1 32 Type You can select the type of item from the drop down list This can be either CALIBR CONTROL SAMPLE or BLANK Name You can edit the name of the item Concentration Dilution 1 The concentration of the calibrator or the dilution of the sample is displayed in this field You can edit this data Assay The name of the assay is required when you have several assays on the same plate Ascent Software User s Guide The operation buttons are e Apply You can apply the well specification from the data fields to the selected well s Clear Clears the well specification from the selected well s 5 e Open You can load a layout file to the session Save As You can save the modified layout as a layout file e Fill You c
261. sigmoid logistic fit Transformation Data Transformation trailing occurs prior to fit calculation Transformation of statistical data means in brief a change of scale used to improve the validity of statistical analyses The default is Linear Linear for concentration and measurement linear The type of Data Transformation can represent either concentration linear concentration logarithm LOG 10 measurement linear or measurement logarithm Logarithmic transformation is employed when data dynamics is considerable This facilitates mathematical adaptions i e curve fitting Note If the concentration range of the calibrators is more than four decades logarithmic transformation should be used to obtain more precise curve fitting Markers Either the means of the measurements or individual measurements replicates are displayed in the graph 3 72 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 9 3 Classification With the classification option it is possible to add cut off interpretations to the Curve Fit sheet The cut off interpretations will be added to the Comment1 column in the concentration list Note The Classification tab is filled in the same way in the Curve Fit and the Cut Off functions Curve fit sheet properties e Number of limits This indicates the number of limits used The default is no limits Ascent Software User s Guide 3 73 e Limit values or formulas Contains defined limit values or formulas
262. sion Note Problems with the version string will arise if the EPROM in the instrument is of an older version The EPROM must then be replaced With an older EPROM you might get connected to the instrument but the instrument will not necessarily operate correctly Use only EPROM version 2 5 with Ascent Software version 2 6 1 4 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 3 3 Software requirements One of the following versions of the operating systems is required e Windows 98 e Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 workstation Note The installation must be carried out through the workstation not through the server e Windows 2000 Note tips must be disabled before installation in Windows 2000 Note e DO NOT use any directory names more than eight characters long Ascent Software does not support long directory names e DO NOT use any nonstandard characters in Ascent Software e DO NOT use a dot character in the directory name The dot character is reserved for the extension Note It is not possible to have two pieces of Ascent Software operating at the same time except in Windows NT where Run in Separate Memory Space can be selected Ascent Software User s Guide 1 5 1 3 4 Before installation Please follow the following instructions for carefree installation of the software 1 3 4 1 Microsoft Windows language settings It is recommended that the operating system language is set to English United States or
263. spense1 for wells A2 H2 Measure for well B1 Measure for wells A2 H2 Dispense2 for well B1 Dispense2 for wells A2 H2 Measure2 for well B1 Measure2 for wells A2 H2 Dispense for well C1 Dispense for wells Measure for well C1 Measure for wells Dispense2 for well C1 Dispense2 for wells Measure2 for well C1 Measure2 for wells y v etc until well H12 etc until well H12 e Dispense all and measure If Dispense all and measure is selected all the wells defined e g by Execute by 1 96 wells will be dispensed and after that the defined wells will be measured If Dispense all and measure is not ticked the instrument dispenses and measures one well at a time before moving on to the next one e Plate acceleration 1 10 Defines the acceleration used for plate movements Acceleration can be varied between setting 1 0 05 m s and setting 10 0 5 m s The highest acceleration can be used for small wells such as on the 96 well plate Lower accelerations are used for larger wells as default values With high viscosity or solid samples e g agar higher than default acceleration speeds can be used The acceleration setting also affects the maximum speed of the plate the lower the acceleration the lower the plate speed 2 34 Ascent Software User s Guide Settle delay 0 10000 ms Defines the time the instrument will wait at each
264. ssit cadets crt rt ee aree nee Ed 4 70 4 1 1 109 YEAR aite oie dec iode 4 71 4 3 Chart reference oc c ETT eo 4 72 4 3 1 Chart 4 72 4 3 2 2 1 4 73 4 3 3 Chart RE 4 74 4 3 3 1 Area Charts 4 74 4 3 3 2 4 74 Ascent Software User s Guide xi 4 3 3 3 Horizontal bar 6 1 4 74 4 3 3 4 Clustered bar 4 74 4 3 3 5 Eine charts oen e 4 75 4 3 3 6 St p Chatts xs eit n dte epe 4 75 4 3 3 7 Combination 4 75 4 3 3 8 Pie and doughnut charts sss 4 75 4 3 3 9 Radar Charts de Paket cud 4 75 4 3 3 10 XY chatte cie eedem ir reete o E 4 76 4 3 3 11 Polar charts teo rre ie eR 4 76 4 3 3 12 B bble ch arts ts er bte e trt e 4 76 4 3 3 13 charts ci e Yvon 4 77 4 3 3 14 Gantt Charts 4 77 4 3 4 Selecting chart elements sssssssseee 4 78 4 3 5 Formatting chart elements 4 80 4 3 6 Floating gt eee 4 80 4 3 7 Double clicking chart 4 83
265. st dispensing after aspiration e Dispenser from 1 to 3 The number of the dispenser used Overwrite general step settings By checking this check box you can define the area and the plate layout for this step different from those defined in the General step When Overwrite general step settings is selected the area definition layout and the settings of the General step are used as default for the current step These parameters can however be edited suitable for the step in question 2 1 5 8 Dispense And Measure not CF Dispense And Measure Steps menu or Use this command to add a Dispense And Measure step to the Steplist With this step dispensing and measuring can be accurately timed as with separate Dispense Measure steps timing is less accurate It is possible to measure simultaneously while dispensing using this step Simultaneous measuring and dispensing is possible when the dispenser is in the M position in addition to the measurement type being either Single or Monitor To avoid splashing in larger wells the dispensing is always carried out in such a manner that the injected squirt hits the side wall of the well when possible This requires moving the plate between dispensing and measuring if the measuring point is not in the correct position during dispensing In this case the plate must be moved to the measuring position which causes a delay of about 0 15 s between the dispensing and measurement For standard 96 w
266. standards and samples it is possible to disable e g one value out of five different measurement values and calculate the results based on these four remaining measurement values On the other hand when a value is enabled it is used in calculations Note The E D Enable Disable icon is present on the results tool bar and specifies a general property employed in for example Cut Off and Curve Fit sheets 3 4 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 Menus results 3 2 1 General Results menu and tool bar Session Edit Print Format Sheet Process Setup Help Deu SA mi lele 2 2 ejk Commands are grouped in menus Some commands carry out an action immediately others display a dialog box for selecting options You can quickly select the most commonly used commands by clicking the tool bar button with the mouse Some menus cannot be used in all situations Format menu items Border Font Number Alignment and Cell References are active in user defined sheets which can be generated after Sheet gt New and Advanced Copy sheet operations Format and Edit are active in the above mentioned sheets Ascent Software User s Guide 3 5 Menu layout Session Edit New Cut Ctrl X Open Copy Ctrl C Save Paste Ctrl V Save As Paste Values Print Clear Del Exit Insert Remove Ctrl R Cell Names CtrI E Find and Replace Ctrl H Go To Cell Enable Disable Print Add Page Break Add Co
267. state i e cleared click To press and release a button on a mouse or similar device or as a noun the action of pressing and releasing a button Most mice have one two or three buttons so the prefixed forms eft click right click middle click are often used click and drag To click and drag involves holding a button down while moving the mouse this technique is often used first to select click and then to move drag an object on the screen clipboard A temporary storage location where a section cut or copied from displayed textual or graphical information is held until it can be pasted into another location close To remove a window or dialog box or quit an application command file script A file containing commands or other actions that could have been entered from the keyboard 4 132 Ascent Software User s Guide command In a dialog box a control shaped like a pushbutton button that carries out an action A command button often has a label that describes the action it carries out for example Cancel Help or Install comms Short for communications as in datacomms or coms com telecomms comms equipment and comms link communicatio n port or com port comms port Any external socket on a computer that can be connected to a communication line and used to exchange information with other computers electronic systems Each type of port has stri
268. t 1 30 1 45 2 19 4 125 2 17 2 18 2 19 3 69 3 71 Vertical Diagonal iaceo tede ceteri 2 22 EET 1 31 2 20 ASCII 1 51 2 54 2 55 4 94 4 122 4 129 4 137 Auto formative ted edet ee dei eee disi eo e dea ec ask edv ee dod 3 82 3 83 Automatic r ntirme GCUrVes iiisereece cer e CO e ure OE Pda 1 45 2 78 session name generation 2 1 41 4404 1 6 2 78 Fev cbe ado d 2 55 4 91 Average rate miene e ea aaa 3 58 4 72 4 74 4 75 4 76 4 77 4 79 4 80 4 81 4 82 4 83 4 79 4 81 4 82 4 83 A Z Worksheet Function 4 97 B M 4 80 4 81 4 82 4 83 legendu EE 4 81 4 83 xiv Ascent Software User s Guide Background1 29 2 35 2 39 2 50 2 71 2 73 2 74 2 75 3 22 4 102 4 111 4 112 4 114 4 129 4 135 MOC NEMINEM 2 50 SHAK ks isis eese ci catre eed cete UTER BER o OR 2 50 Beam De do v Ye ondes 2 10 2 39 2 73 2 74 2 75 3 14 BOWSG rdc nnde EN 1 9 1 17 2 55 2 79 3 26 3 85 B ff ritigi s e nib eret iet elas 4 95 Cancel DUO M ci educi
269. t LEN and SEARCH functions EXACT Match Match returns True EXACT Match match returns False Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 29 EXP Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 30 FACT Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns e raised to the specified power The constant e is 2 71828182845904 the base of the natural logarithm EXP number The number is any number expressed as the exponent LN and LOG functions EXP 2 5 returns 12 18 EXP 3 returns 20 09 Returns the factorial of a specified number FACT number The number is any non negative integer If you supply a real number the FACT truncates the number to an integer before calculation PRODUCT function FACT 2 5 returns 2 FACT 6 returns 720 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 23 4 2 2 31 FALSE Description Returns the logical value False This function always requires the trailing parentheses Syntax FALSE See Also TRUE function 4 2 2 32 FIND Description Searches for a string of text within another text string and returns the character position at which the search string first occurs Syntax FIND search_text text start_position The search_text is the text to find If you specify an empty string the FIND matches the first character in the text The text is the text to be searched The start_position is the character position in the text where the search begins The first charac
270. t is called a inear list The two basic representation forms for lists are sequentially allocated lists and linked lists the latter being more flexible list box Within an application window or dialog box a type of box that lists available choices for example a list of all files in a directory If all the choices do not fit in the list box there is a scroll bar loop 1 A sequence of instructions that is repeated until a prescribed condition such as agreement with a data element or completion of a count is satisfied 2 A configuration of a local area network that consists of nodes connected serially in a ring topology 3 local loop The twisted pair connection from a switching exchange to the subscriber terminal 4 140 Ascent Software User s Guide MB or Mb Mbyte Symbols or abbreviations for megabyte Usually 1 048 576 bytes 27 sometimes interpreted as 1 million bytes menu A list of options that may be displayed either vertically or horizontally on a screen and from which one or more items may be selected using an input device menu bar In either a text or graphics based user interface a row usually horizontal of words or abbreviations that when activated by a pointing device or a sequence of key depressions cause some appropriate action This may involve the display of menus menu bypass A technique whereby expert users of a menu driven program may avoid the proces
271. t is used in calculations Enable Disable specifies a general property employed in for example Cut Off and Curve Fit sheets In a Blank Subtraction sheet you can Enable Disable BLANK well values It is effective in Blank Subtraction calculations In a Curve Fit sheet you can Enable Disable calibrator values and values in the Result list In the Cut Off sheet you can Enable Disable control values and calculated values in the Result list The Enable Disable command is not active in Measure sheets containing only one measurement point per well Ascent Software User s Guide 3 13 3 2 4 View 3 2 4 1 Desktop Bar Desktop Bar View menu The Desktop tabviews are located to the right of the active desktop The Desktop tabview selects the active desktop for the program When the desktop is changed the menus and tool bars also change Did A 21 1 Use this command to view the Desktop Bar 3 2 4 2 Status Bar Status Bar View menu When a command is selected the left side of the status bar briefly describes the command Normally the status bar shows the line state of the instrument the beam size selected temperature and the current time 3 14 Ascent Software User s Guide Instrument status bar Connected to Fluoroskan Ascent FL 2 5 0 Normal beam 22 0 C 11 51 27 Note The status bar at the bottom of the screen also displays information about a selected command Message status bar
272. t speeds The speeds of the dispenser pump s are set according e g to the viscosity and other properties of the liquids used e Default speed The maximum speed of the dispenser pump syringe during the dispensing see the following figure The changed 2 66 Ascent Software User s Guide Default speed is effective in the following session Session New In certain cases e g with small dispensing volumes the Default speed may not be reached e Start speed The speed with which the dispenser pump starts when the dispensing starts The Start speed is effective immediately e Cutoff speed The speed at which the dispenser pump stops completely after the dispenser pump syringe has moved the required dimension The Cutoff speed is effective immediately Slope Both the acceleration speed when the pump accelerates from the Start speed to the Default speed and the deceleration speed when the pump decelerates from the Default speed to the Cutoff speed The Slope is effective immediately The Slope value can at times be slightly changed e Defaults Reads the parameters from the initialization file and sets the factory pre set values The default settings Default speed 18 Start speed 100 Cutoff speed 100 and Slope 70 are for water type liquids Default Speed Start Speed Cutoff Speed Ascent Software User s Guide 2 67 2 1 6 5 Colors Colors Setup menu Select type colors B BN EH BREE
273. t temperature to 45 C Note e The temperature inside the instrument is approx 3 C above the ambient temperature e The following exception for Incubate steps applies Incubate steps with an ncubation time of zero are executed only once These are only used in order to break a loop e Use the mouse or keyboard keys to set the temperature First choose the temperature selector by using the mouse or tab key Keys Step C Direction Arrow key left 0 1 Down Arrow key right 0 1 Up Page Up 1 Down Page Down 1 Up Home Amb temp Down End 45 Up If the instrument is always used at a higher temperature than ambient temperature it is convenient to select set Startup temperature from the Options on p 2 77 menu and no separate incubation step is then required Use Options Startup temperature to warm up the instrument 2 48 Ascent Software User s Guide Note The incubation will be turned on until Ascent Software is switched off 2 1 5 10 Shake Shake Steps menu or Use this command to add Shake step to the Steplist Parameters General b Measurel Total time hh mm ss 00 00 10 Shakel N time hh mm ss 00 00 10 OFF time hh mm ss 00 00 00 Diameter 1 50 Speed 60 1200 rpm 1200 H Background mode The parameters of the Shake step are e Step name The name of the step The name is generated automatically and must be unique e Total time hh mm ss
274. t the home sensor of the stepper The plate did not arrive at the home sensor within the expected time The actual and the expected filter wheel positions differ too much at the home sensor The filter wheel did not arrive at the home sensor within the expected time The actual and the expected filter wheel positions differ too much at the home sensor The filter wheel did not arrive at the home sensor within the expected time An attempt to measure with a filter pair that has not been validated Actions Decrease the shaking speed or the shaking diameter Only shake when the plate is in If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service If the error persists contact service Validate the filter pair before using it Continued Ascent Software User s Guide Message e Too long ramp for a scan Change the scanning direction or decrease the integration time Autocalibration not carried out e long integration time for a scan measurement e Instrument gain levels not within tolerance e high factor drift Reason The start of the acceleration ramp or the end of the deceleration ramp for scanning is outside the moving area of the plate Cannot measure if autocalibration is not carried out The instr
275. target is the selection made before the Function dialog was started When the Next button is pressed Function Definition Select cells from the Measure sheet by using the mouse number 1 number 2 and number 3 Place the cursor in the argument field where you want to enter the selection Type the argument or select the area by using the mouse By clicking the Function Definition dialog the selected area is updated number 1 etc fields Ascent Software User s Guide 3 43 4 Function Definition id uf el MeasuetBS di ml Number 4 is defined by using the AVERAGE number list function Note Place the cursor in field number 4 Then select the function button f at the end of line number 4 from the Function Definition dialog Select Statistical AVERAGE and press the Next button MexwelC amp t MeswenbaD 3 44 Ascent Software User s Guide The Nested dialog is displayed Select or key in the arguments Typing errors can easily occur when you key in the arguments yourself instead of using the selection When you press the OK button the AVERAGE function appears in field number 4 or in the location where the cursor is 4 Function Definition Wesuenbs mj Mewueibo 7 AVERAGE Measure1 C4 C amp Measure fx When the Finish button is pressed the entered formula is inserted into the Target location Ascent Software Use
276. teplist they are not executed until the run has been completed for more information see Section Steps Save Load in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 5 9 Print step To print sheets automatically the Print step can be used Sheets are printed according to the current print area The Print step is executed after all the other steps for more information see Section Steps Print in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 6 Area definition The area definition is used to select the target areas for the Measure and Dispense steps The floating menu appears by pressing the right mouse button in the Area definition window The area is selected deselected by painting the desired area from the points Areas are selected from the points in the selected plate template There is always one selectable point in the middle of each well Selectable points inside the well are in a 1 5 mm grid The area definition contains tools to select and deselect individual points e remove undesired points e middle point of the wells 1 30 Ascent Software User s Guide e points the well area horizontal or vertical diagonal of the wells Parameters Area definition Layout Settings HE OCHE Point Middle Point Whole Well Horizontal Diagonal Vertical Diagonal Remove For more information see Area definition in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual Note To properly update the existing results
277. ter in the text is character number 1 When you omit this argument the default starting position is character number 1 Remarks The FIND is case sensitive You cannot use wild card characters in the search_text See Also EXACT LEN MID and SEARCH functions Examples FIND Em Ex 320 Em 405 returns 8 FIND Ex 320 Em 405 4 returns 10 4 24 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 33 FIXED Description Syntax See Also Examples Rounds a number to the supplied precision formats the number into decimal format and returns the result as text FIXED number precision no commas number is any number The precision is the number of digits that appear to the right of the decimal place When this argument is omitted a default precision of 2 is used If you specify a negative precision the number is rounded to the left of the decimal point You can specify a precision with as many as 127 digits The no commas determines if thousands separators commas are used in the result Use 1 to exclude commas in the result If the no commas is 0 or the argument is omitted the thousands separators are included e g 1 000 00 ROUND TEXT and VALUE functions FIXED 2000 5 3 returns 2 000 500 FIXED 2009 5 1 1 returns 2010 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 25 4 2 2 34 FLOOR Description Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a specified significance Syntax FLOOR number significance The nu
278. the backup battery for the memory is at an end The filter command requested a filter that was not on the filter wheel The Precalculation sheet needs two source sheets if the first source sheet is not dual or dual kinetic The Precalculation sheet can only be created from two separate measurement steps or Contact service Set the second source sheet in the sheet properties from a dual measurement containing two measurement parameters Continued 4 113 Message e Cannot dispense into a plate over 21 mm high e Dispensing is not allowed with plates less than 13 5 mm high e integration time is too long in step STEPNAME Longer than 10000 ms is allowed only in SINGLE measurements and when executed by one well e The instrument does not support luminometric methods e Please confirm that the light guard is installed e Please confirm that the light guard has been removed e instrument cover is open 4 114 Reason The type of plate is too high for dispensing The type of plate is too low for dispensing The reader cannot have that long an integration time with the current parameters The reader is not able to carry out luminometric measurements Luminometric measurements need a light guard to avoid high background noise The type of plate is so high that the light guard cannot be used The cover of the instrument is open during measurement Reported
279. the wall of the well when possible for more information see Section Steps Dispense in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 5 6 Dispense And Measure step not CF This step is a combination of the Dispense and the Measure steps Dispensing and measuring can be started at the same time The parameters are the same as in the separate Dispense and Measure steps The step has a check box Overwrite general step settings which breaks up the dispensing and measuring to work in loops If the Execute by 1 n wells value is 1 the dispensing and measuring is carried out well by well through the selected area If the value is over 1 e g 3 dispensing and measuring is carried out to the next 3 wells The selected area is handled in groups of 3 wells for more information see Section Steps Measure in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual The Dispense all and measure check box in General step Settings affects the Dispense And Measure step see Section General step Settings on p 1 26 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 29 1 5 5 7 Pause step The Pause step pauses the run drives the plate out and gives an alarm if desired for more information see Section Steps Pause in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 5 8 Save Load step The Save Load step can be used to save a Results Desktop sheet in a file Save or to load a sheet from a file to the Results Desktop Load Although they can be placed anywhere in the S
280. the condition evaluates to False See Also AND FALSE NOT OR and TRUE functions Examples IF A1 gt 10 Greater Less returns Greater if the contents of A1 is greater than 10 and Less if the contents of A1 is less than 10 4 28 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 38 INDEX Description Syntax Remarks See Also Returns the contents of a cell from a specified range INDEX reference row column range number The reference is a reference to one or more ranges If the reference specifies more than one range separate each reference with a comma and enclose the reference in parentheses e g A1 C6 B7 E14 F4 If each range in the reference contains only one row or column you can omit the row or column argument For example if the reference is A1 A15 you can omit the column argument e g INDEX A1 A15 3 1 The row is the row number in the reference from which to return data The co umn is the column number in the reference from which to return data The range_number specifies the range from which the data is returned if the reference contains more than one range For example if the reference is A1 A10 B1 B5 D14 E23 then A1 A10 is the range_number 1 B1 B5 the range number 2 and 014 23 the range number 3 If the row column and range number do not point to cell within the reference the REF is returned If the row and column are omitted the INDEX returns the range in
281. the current chart on the clipboard in Windows Metafile wmf format Takes a graphic in Windows Bitmap bmp or Windows Metafile wmf format from the clipboard and places it on the selected element s backdrop or fill Displays the Print dialog box Saves the current file as a chart file vtc a bitmap bmp or a metafile wmf Loads an existing chart file into the current chart control The chart that you load replaces the chart already in the control If you use the menu to display the Format Axis Format Axis Title Format Axis Label Format Series Format Series Label Format Data Point or Format Data Point Label dialog boxes you are prompted to identify the specific axis series or data point that you want to modify 4 82 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 3 7 Double clicking chart elements You can also display dialog boxes by double clicking chart elements The following table lists the dialog box displayed when you double click various chart elements To format Chart Backdrop Footnote Title Legend Backdrop Legend Text Plot Axis Label Axis Line or Ticks Axis Title Grid Double click The chart but not ona specific chart element Any part of the footnote Any part of the title Anywhere in the legend area other than the text or keys The legend text Anywhere in the plot area but not ona specific chart element An axis label The line or ticks on an axis The ax
282. the hyperbolic cosine of a number Syntax COSH number The number is any number See Also ASINH ATANH and COS functions Examples COSH 2 10 returns 4 14 COSH 24 returns 1 03 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 17 4 2 2 21 COUNT Description Returns the number of values on the supplied list Syntax COUNT va ue ist The value ist is list of values The list can contain as many as 30 values Remarks The COUNT only numerates numbers or numerical values e g logical values dates or text representations of dates If you supply a range only numbers and numerical values in the range are counted Empty cells logical values text and error values in the range are ignored See Also AVERAGE COUNTA and SUM functions Examples COUNT 5 6 Q2 returns 2 COUNT 03 06 94 06 21 94 10 19 94 returns 3 4 2 2 22 COUNTA Description Returns the number of nonblank values on the supplied list Syntax COUNTA expression list The expression list is a list of expressions As many as 30 expressions can be included in the list Remarks The COUNTA returns the number of cells that contain data in a range Null values are counted but references to empty cells are ignored See Also AVERAGE COUNT PRODUCT and SUM functions 4 18 Ascent Software User s Guide Examples 4 2 2 23 DATE Description Syntax See Also Examples COUNTA 32 45 Average returns 4 COUNTA C38 C40 return
283. the lag time or interval times of the Measure steps b Kinetic measurement shake before each count setting up a session with having the instrument shake right before each measurement count interval background Measure interval background Measure time shake time shake A Shake step with Background mode and the following time settings 2 50 Ascent Software User s Guide Total time not needed ON time How long you want the instrument to shake here 30 seconds and OFF time If zero will start shaking as soon as the instrument is idle which means that the shaking starts at the beginning of the Measure step s lag or interval time If the OFF time is greater than the lag time or the interval time then the shaking will commence at the time set for the ON time right before the measurement 2 1 5 11 Pause Pause Steps menu or ry Use this command to add a Pause step to the Steplist E Parameters General step name Pause Measuret Message Waiting time hh mm ss 00 01 00 Run plate out Options Alarm The parameters of the Pause step are e Step name The name of the step The name is generated automatically or given by the user and must be unique e Plate ID A plate ID can be added It will be written the Steps sheet on the Results Desktop Ascent Software User s Guide 2 51 Note The plate ID can be referenced in the custom made report sheets or in the c
284. the run and the actual temperature The RunStatus report also includes data about the steps In addition the RunStatus information reports the ending time of the run number of warnings and errors and the actual temperature For more information see RunStatus in both the Procedure Desktop and Results Desktop parts of the manual 1 5 5 2 Measure step The Measure step measures the given area well by well according to the step parameters The measurement method can be set in this step the method can be either fluorometric or luminometric FL only The Measure step contains the following measurement types with their own parameters e Single e Dual e Kinetic e Dual kinetic e Scanning e Monitor For more information see Section Steps Measure in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 28 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 5 5 3 Incubate step The Incubate step sets the time and the temperature for the incubation in the instrument for more information see Section Steps Incubate in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 5 4 Shake step The Shake step shakes the plate using the given parameters It is also possible to use shaking as a background task Shaking is then on when the reader does not have other tasks to perform for more information see Section Steps Shake in the Procedure Desktop part of the manual 1 5 5 5 Dispense step not CF Dispenses with the selected dispenser the defined volume against
285. thin the allowed moving area of the measuring head There was too high a position error when the stepper passed the home sensor The stepper home sensor was not detected within the allowed time There was too high a position error when the stepper passed the home sensor The stepper home sensor was not detected within the allowed time There was too high a position error when the stepper passed the home sensor The stepper home sensor was not detected within the allowed time There was too high a position error when the stepper passed the home sensor The stepper home sensor was not detected within the allowed time Actions This error should never appear if the instrument is used in the standalone mode or through the Ascent PC software Check that the plate is properly installed in the plate holder Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Check that the filter wheel is in place Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Contact service if the error persists Continued 4 103 Message e Cannot measure in continuous mode e RAM error e XP Y measurement count error e high ground signal noise level e Gain steps 1 10 not within tolerance e EEPROM checksum error
286. this command to run the Function dialog The Function dialog allows you to create formulas easily By using the Function dialog the formatting is made exact and the possibilities of typing errors occurring is eliminated Just select the function group and Ascent Software User s Guide 3 41 function from a list and enter the function arguments When you select a function from the list box the definition of the function and of its arguments will automatically appear as well as the correct placement of commas and parentheses When an argument is followed by an extension list you can have more than one argument of that data type You can have up to 30 arguments for some functions as long as the total number of characters in the formula does not exceed 1024 In addition no individual string can be longer than 255 characters The user can if accustomed to it key in the equations into the cell without using the Function dialog Example STDEV Standard deviation E Function Statistical e Function Groups Displays the names of the function groups e Functions Displays all the functions in a current function group e Selected Function Displays the function syntax e Close Closes the Function dialog e Next Allows you to enter values for the arguments 3 42 Ascent Software User s Guide Note When the Function dialog is displayed you can select the target cell where you want to insert the function The default
287. to a second range Syntax LOOKUP ookup_value lookup range result range The ookup value is the value for which to search in the first range The ookup range is the first range to search and contains only one row or one column The range can contain numbers text or logical values To search for the ookup range correctly the expressions in the range have to be placed in ascending order e g 2 1 0 1 2 A through Z False True The search is not case sensitive The result range is a range consisting of one row or one column that is of the same size as the ookup range Remarks If the ookup value does not have an exact match in the ookup range the largest value that is less than or equal to the ookup value is found and the corresponding position in the result range is returned When the lookup value is smaller than the data in the lookup range the N A is returned See Also HLOOKUP INDEX and VLOOKUP functions 4 38 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 56 LOWER Description Changes the characters in the specified string to lowercase characters Numerical characters in the string are not changed Syntax LOWER text The text is any string See Also PROPER and UPPER functions Examples LOWER 3rd Sample returns 3rd sample LOWER JOHN DOE returns john doe 4 2 2 57 MATCH Description A specified value is compared to values in a range The position of the matching value in the searc
288. to select or deselect Outline Puts a border around the outer edges of the selection Top Left Right Bottom Puts a border along the specified edges of each cell in the selection e Border Sets the line style to apply to a border e Color Sets the border color Ascent Software User s Guide 3 27 3 2 6 2 Font Font Format menu Use this command to change the font style size color and effects strikeout underline of the text in the selected cells O Narrow O Bauhaus 93 i O Book Antiqua O Bookman Old Style O Century Gothic gt e Font Lists all available font types Select the font you want or enter the name of the font in the box above the list of font types e Font style Lists the available font styles Select the font style you want or enter the font style in the box above the list of font styles e Size Lists the available sizes for the font selected in the Font box Select a font size or enter the size you want in the box above the list of sizes 3 28 Ascent Software User s Guide Effects Strikeout Formats selected characters with a line through the middle Note E D Enable Disable visibly looks about the same as strikeout Underline Underlines the selected characters e Color Lists the available colors Select a color for the text from the drop down list e Sample Shows a sample of the text with the current font formatting choices applied e Scri
289. topics Basic operations Results Desktop menus e Setting up the system gt References Fluoroskan Ascent This is the Help for Fluoroskan Ascent FL and Fluoroskan Ascent e Making applications Result sheets References The Help main menu buttons are e Hide Hides the left hand side navigation window To display the navigation window again click the Show button that appears instead of the Hide button e Back Takes you back to the previous view in your view history e Forward Takes you to the next view in your view history Print Prints a single topic or multiple topics You can access the help content in three different ways by selecting one of the following tabs e Contents Browse the help topics by subject e Index Type in a keyword or browse all keywords to find a specific topic Ascent Software User s Guide 1 17 Search Find a specific help topic by entering words to search in the help content Note images in the help application contain links to topics When you see an image move the cursor across the image to find the links 1 4 Configuration The Setup menu is used when the configuration of one of the following parts of the system is changed Plate Templates Instrument filter parameters Passwords starting the password system and changing passwords Dispenser Setup Colors Printout Setup Dispenser Setup The Execute menu contains tools which are need
290. transformation Linear 61 Parameters a b 62 0 0983 1 5120 53 Corr coeff R2 1 0000 1 at Connected to Fluoroskan Ascent FL 0 0 0 Normalbeam 220 C 152539 1 40 Ascent Software User s Guide 1 6 Printing You can print selected worksheets or sheet areas for example Steps Measure RunStatus and Curve Fit sheets by defining the ranges print formats and other print options Print commands can be found in both the Session menu and the Print menu when Results Desktop is selected 1 7 Using tools The main tools of the program The Procedure Desktop for assay setup and instrument control Using the advanced graphical interface the assay procedure steps are simply dragged from the toolbox and dropped into the desktop Steplist Every step has its own parameters Wells to be measured can be selected in a completely visual format Any combination of wells can be measured The Results Desktop for data reduction and results calculation When an assay is defined the calculations and the reports are configured in a unique spreadsheet environment The assay may consist of several worksheets which are open simultaneously and allow easy cross referencing of data from one sheet to another Along with the basic spreadsheet functions a number of other calculation methods including curve fittings qualitative cut offs and statistical functions are also available The Template Editor to create templates The advanced
291. ts This allows the user to create charts and handle data more easily The Organize command creates a new sheet and reorganizes the kinetic data rows by measurement count and columns by well address by using relative addressing It is not recommended to write your own data in the unused cells in the Organize sheet since the data is destroyed when the session is rerun In the Properties dialog you can give the parameters for the sheet Ascent Software User s Guide 3 47 3 2 8 3 1 Source Organize sheet properties e Source sheet name Select the sheet containing the data you want to organize 3 48 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 8 3 2 Source and calculation Organize sheet properties e Source data Measurement data is organized e Source data with times Both measurement data and measurement times are organized Arrange direction column Data is organized by column e By row Data is organized by row Ascent Software User s Guide 3 49 3 2 8 3 3 View See display figure below A result matrix for further calculations can be selected Organize sheet properties If matrix is used formulas need to be entered into the cells of the matrix e g AVERAGE B16 B100 Note The user s own formulas might disappear from the sheets created automatically by the software when the session is rerun If you want to maintain the formulas it is recommended that you use the Sheet Advan
292. u Adds vertical and horizontal page breaks adjacent to the current cell 3 2 5 2 Add Col Page Break Add Col Page Break Print menu Adds a vertical page break adjacent to the current cell 3 2 5 3 Add Row Page Break Add Row Page Break Print menu Adds a horizontal page break adjacent to the current cell Shortcut Ctrl Enter 3 2 5 4 Remove Page Break Remove Page Break Print menu Removes vertical and horizontal page breaks adjacent to the current cell Shortcut Ctrl M 3 2 5 5 Page Setup Page Setup Print menu Use this command to set the page setup Ascent Software User s Guide 3 19 Page Setup amp LAscent Software amp C amp F amp R amp D amp T amp CPages amp P amp N E uu Gm Controls the headers footers margins and many other options for the selected worksheet Headers and footers are descriptive texts which are printed at the top and bottom of every page in your sheet You can add delete edit format and position headers and footers and view them as they will be printed The values given separately for every sheet including the Measure Steps RunStatus and Measure1 Curves sheets are stored from run to run The scale does not keep its value but is always changed to 100 in a run When the order of the steps is changed and the session has been 3 20 Ascent Software User s Guide stored and opened the values for the aforementioned sheets are initialized to the values set
293. u can resize or reposition it Selection handles appear around the footnote You can resize or reposition it Selection handles appear around the legend You can resize or reposition it Selection handles appear on all elements of the chart series A handle also appears on the legend key Selection handles appear around the label You can reposition it Selection handles appear around the chart plot You can resize or reposition it Continued Ascent Software User s Guide To select Axis Axis title Chart grid 2 D wall and 3 D wall or base Data point Data point label Click On the axis text axis line or axis ticks Anywhere in the axis title area On any grid line Any part of the base or wall other than a grid line Click a data point ina selected series or a data point in the same series as another selected data point Anywhere on the data point label Ascent Software User s Guide Effect Selection handles appear on the axis You cannot manually resize the axis Selection handles appear around the axis title Selection handles appear around the grid Selection handles appear around the wall on a 2 D chart and the base and wall on a 3 D chart Selection handles appear on the single data point only Selection handles appear around the data point label You can reposition it 4 79 4 3 5 Formatting chart elements You can format any element o
294. ument is not able to move the plate as slowly as the integration time requires The instrument automatically selects between the gains 1 10 100 and 1000 when measuring During startup these gains are checked and fitted together If any of the gains differ too much from the nominal value this error is reported Autocalibration measures a reference chip and calculates a correction factor for the measurement results If it differs too much from the nominal value of 1 0 this error is reported Ascent Software User s Guide Actions Change the scanning direction or decrease the integration time or do not scan points near the edge of the plate Autocalibrate Shorten the integration time Contact service First try validating the filter pair again If this does not help or revalidation is required frequently contact service Continued 4 109 Message e high offset in temperature measurement e high stepper offset e Temperature set value out of range e Instrument gain levels adjustment failed e Dispenser init failed e Invalid dispenser command e Invalid dispenser command operand e Invalid dispenser command sequence e Dispenser EEPROM failure e Dispenser not initialized 4 110 Reason The A D converter offset of the temperature measuring electronics is too high to guarantee the specified temperature range Attempt to set a too high stepper
295. urns a logical value Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 45 ISNA Description Determines if the specified expression returns the value not available error Syntax ISNA expression The expression is any expression Remarks If the expression returns the N A error True is returned Otherwise False is returned See Also ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions Examples ISNA A1 returns True if cell A1 contains the NA function or returns the error value N A 4 2 2 46 ISNONTEXT Description Determines if the specified expression is not a text Syntax ISNONTEXT expression The expression is any expression Remarks If the expression returns any value that is not a text True is returned Otherwise False is returned See Also ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNUMBER ISREF and ISTEXT functions Examples ISNONTEXT F3 returns True if cell F3 contains a number or is a blank cell ISNONTEXT text returns False Ascent Software User s Guide 4 33 4 2 2 47 ISNUMBER 4 2 2 48 ISREF 4 34 Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Description Syntax Remarks See Also Examples Determines if the specified expression is a number ISNUMBER express on The expression is any expression If the expression returns a number True is returned Otherwise False is returned If the expression returns a number represented a
296. uters will support data transfers in either direction Ascent Software User s Guide 4 143 parity In brief parity is an error checking procedure in which the number of 1 s must always be the same either even or odd for each group of bits transmitted without error password A secret group of letters or numbers that must be put into a computer before you can use a system or program paste To insert the contents of the clipboard or the paste buffer into a text or graphics object at a desired point Many applications have a Paste command on the Edit menu that performs this task PIF program information file A file that provides information about how Windows should run a non Windows application For example you use a PIF to direct Windows to run a non Windows application in a full screen rather than in a window or to specify a startup directory pop up menu A menu that appears on the display when the user changes the state of a button or makes a selection from a menu bar The menu item is selected by pointing to the desired entry before changing the button state back to the original state pop up The messages that appear when pop up Help is used messages pop up A program that is permanently resident in memory program and pops up onto the screen at the touch of a key print quality The characteristics of the printed characters on a printout of a printer e g characters
297. ves1 4 1 7 1 15 1 30 1 51 2 5 2 6 2 8 2 12 3 36 3 38 4 92 4 118 4 119 4 120 4 137 4 138 E Edit d 3 5 3 6 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 46 4 144 Gell Names cce dd aet enr eod eene cae cg cad der Tc 3 6 3 11 Clear 1 33 1 36 2 25 2 28 2 30 2 31 3 6 3 9 3 47 1 33 1 45 2 25 3 6 3 8 3 15 3 38 4 82 engem 1 33 2 25 3 6 3 8 3 15 Enable Disable 1 3 3 4 3 6 3 13 3 29 3 64 Find and Repl ce 5 nei 3 6 3 12 Go To Gellzz cesi eet eerte 3 6 3 13 Pete a dns 3 6 3 10 4 115 4 116 4 121 gie 1 33 2 25 3 6 3 9 3 15 4 82 4 144 Paste Valtles ec e eerie eot eed esse Lez ere eda 3 6 3 9 xvi Ascent Software User s Guide Removet 42 1 43 2 2 2 17 2 22 2 57 2 63 3 6 3 10 3 19 4 100 4 125 Effective Hie 3 67 Jail 1 3 1 4 Example Curve Fit 20445000 3 76 Example Instrument Status report 1 3 1 13 2 2 2 40 2 73 Example RunStatus 2 36 Exarmpl SessIOnS ue Ded tl ga ce ea E ges 1 16 Examples of setting up time 2 50
298. w to scroll without changing the current selection with all the movement keys except Home End CTRL Home and CTRL End Extends the current selection 4 2 Calculations 4 2 1 Mathematical operators The following table shows typical mathematical operators used or unary or or lt gt lt gt lt gt not unary or Ascent Software User s Guide 4 5 4 2 2 A Z worksheet function reference This chapter provides a complete alphabetical reference to the worksheet functions Refer to Built In Worksheet Functions for additional information on how to use the worksheet functions ABS ACOS ACOSH ADDRESS AND ASIN ASINH ATAN ATAN2 ATANH AVERAGE CEILING CHAR CHOOSE CLEAN CODE COLUMN COLUMNS COS COSH COUNT COUNTA DATE DATEVALUE DAY ERROR TYPE EVEN EXACT EXP FACT FALSE FIND FIXED FLOOR HLOOKUP HOUR IF 4 6 INDEX INDIRECT INT ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISREF ISTEXT LEFT LEN LN LOG LOG10 LOOKUP LOWER MATCH MAX MIDX MIN MINUTE MOD MONTH N NA NOT NOW ODD OFFSET OR PI PRODUCT PROPER RAND REPLACE REPT RIGHT ROUND ROW ROWS SEARCH SECOND SIGN SIN SINH SORTX STDEV STDEVP SUBSTITUTE SUM SUMSQ T TAN TANH TEXT TIME TIMEVALUE TODAY TRIM TRUE TRUNC TYPE UPPER VALUE VAR VARP VLOOKUP WEEKDAY YEAR Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 1 ABS Description Syntax
299. xt if A4 contains number Ascent Software User s Guide 4 61 4 2 2 93 TAN Description Returns the tangent of the specified angle Syntax TAN number The number is the angle expressed in radians To convert a number expressed as degrees to radians multiply the degrees by 180 See Also ATAN ATAN2 PI and TANH functions Examples TAN 45 returns 1 62 TAN 90 returns 2 00 4 2 2 94 TANH Description Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number Syntax TANH number The number is any number See Also ATANH COSH SINH and TAN functions Examples TANH 2 returns 96 TANH 1 2 returns 83 4 62 Ascent Software User s Guide 4 2 2 95 TEXT Description Syntax See Also Examples 4 2 2 96 TIME Description Syntax See Also Examples Returns the given number as text using the specified formatting TEXT number format The number is any value a formula that evaluates to a number or a reference to a cell that contains a value The format is a string representing a number format The string can be any valid format string including General M DD YY or H MM AM PM The format must be surrounded by a set of double quotation marks Asterisks cannot be included in the format FIXED T and VALUE functions TEXT 123 62 0 000 returns 123 620 TEXT 34626 2 MM DD YY returns 10 19 94 Returns a serial number for the supplied time TIME hour minute second The h
300. y connected but off line if the system has been instructed not to use it offset Sustained deviation of the control point from the index or desired value online or on line On Line 1 Connected to the system and usable 2 Online operation Procedure such that results are available immediately e g online help open To instruct an application that a particular file is required for reading writing or both When a file is opened its name is passed to the operating system which locates it and checks that it exists and is available creating it if necessary before giving to the application status information and the location of the first record Once a file has been opened for writing it is normally unavailable to other applications until it has been closed operator 1 A person responsible for the immediate supervision of the hardware of a computer system 2 A function that can be applied to one or more operands so as to yield a result It is a symbol representing an operation to be carried out as opposed to a variable which represents a data value Arithmetic operator is a type of operator appearing in an expression denoting one of the operations of arithmetic e g multiplication divide 4 142 Ascent Software User s Guide option button A small round button that appears in a dialog box Within a group of related option buttons you can select only one output
301. y of information held within a computer system using the facilities of a database management system 2 Colloquially a collection of data on a subject however defined accessed and stored within a computer system data chaining Organizing a data file so that records are linked A record may belong to more than one chain Chaining allows access to records in a number of different sequences data entry The process in which an operator uses a keyboard or other device to input data directly into a system data file A file containing data such as a file created within an applications program for example it may be a word processing document a spreadsheet a database file or a chart default A value that is used when no other value has been supplied Nearly every application has defaults for something delete 1 To remove or obliterate a record or item of data such as by overwriting data on disk or tape with new data or null characters 2 To remove permanently an object such as a character word paragraph or graphic from a document or to remove an entire document file from permanent storage deselect To reverse the action of selecting an option a range of text a collection of graphical objects and so on 4 134 Ascent Software User s Guide desktop The screen background for Windows which windows icons and dialog boxes appear In other words an on screen work area that us
302. yed Format Series Label Format Data Point Format Data Point Label Format Axis Format Axis Label Format Axis Title Format Legend Format Title Ascent Software User s Guide Purpose Controls the series label location and line style edits the label text formats the label text and position and formats the label backdrop Formats the fill and marker of an individual data point Controls the type and location of the label on an individual data point formats the font and layout of the label text and formats the label backdrop Formats the width and color of the axis axis grid and axis ticks and changes the axis scale Formats the axis label backdrop and font and controls the positioning and alignment of the axis labels Formats the axis title backdrop and font edits the axis title text and controls the display of the axis title and its location Formats the legend backdrop changes the font used to display the legend text and controls the legend location Formats the title backdrop and font edits the title text and controls the display of the title and its location Continued 4 81 Item Footnote Copy Paste Print Save As Load Dialog box displayed Format Footnote None None Print Save As Load Chart Purpose Formats the footnote backdrop and font edits the footnote text controls the display of the footnote and its location Places a copy of
303. yed Use this dialog box to specify the option properties e g the darkness and fineness of the graphics and text and whether or not to convert TrueType fonts to graphics when printing e Paper Ascent Software User s Guide 3 25 Size Select letter legal or some other paper size option Source You can specify which paper feeder to use e Orientation Specify the orientation for the printed image Portrait Prints with the short edge of the paper horizontal Landscape Prints with the long edge of the paper horizontal e Network The contents of this dialog box depends on the Windows version and the printer employed Use this dialog box to browse through and connect to a network printer To connect to a network printer Capture Printer Port you assign a port virtual port to the printer device and you specify the path computer name and share name The share name equals the network name and is e g the name under the icon of a shared printer You can also choose whether or not to reconnect at logon 3 2 5 9 Print ES Print Print menu or Use this command to print the current sheet Note The layout of this dialog depends on the printer used 3 26 Ascent Software User s Guide 3 2 6 Format 3 2 6 1 Border Border Format menu Use the Format Border command to add or remove border lines in the selected cells Left 7 Right Color do e Borders Click the check box es

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Road Accident Data User Guide  BAVM-860SAW User Manual    HI 83740 Medidor de Iões Específicos para COBRE na análise do  Manual - Petri Konferenztechnik  Le lien s`ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre•Introduction  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file